U.S. patent application number 11/018331 was filed with the patent office on 2005-06-16 for use of small molecule radioligands to discover inhibitors of amyloid-beta peptide production and for diagnostic imaging.
Invention is credited to Olson, Richard E., Seiffert, Dietmar A., Thompson, Lorin A., Zaczek, Robert.
Application Number | 20050129612 11/018331 |
Document ID | / |
Family ID | 22758997 |
Filed Date | 2005-06-16 |
United States Patent
Application |
20050129612 |
Kind Code |
A1 |
Zaczek, Robert ; et
al. |
June 16, 2005 |
Use of small molecule radioligands to discover inhibitors of
amyloid-beta peptide production and for diagnostic imaging
Abstract
This invention relates to a method of using radiolabelled and/or
radiopharmaceutical small molecule inhibitors of beta-amyloid
peptide production for the diagnosis of neurological and other
disorders involving APP processing and beta-amyloid production.
Furthermore, radiolabelled small molecule inhibitors identified by
the methods of the present invention would be useful in the
diagnosis of neurological disorders, such as Alzheimer's disease,
which involve elevated levels of A.beta. peptides.
Inventors: |
Zaczek, Robert; (Avondale,
PA) ; Olson, Richard E.; (Wilmington, DE) ;
Seiffert, Dietmar A.; (Boothwyn, PA) ; Thompson,
Lorin A.; (Wilmington, DE) |
Correspondence
Address: |
PILLSBURY WINTHROP, LLP
P.O. BOX 10500
MCLEAN
VA
22102
US
|
Family ID: |
22758997 |
Appl. No.: |
11/018331 |
Filed: |
December 21, 2004 |
Related U.S. Patent Documents
|
|
|
|
|
|
Application
Number |
Filing Date |
Patent Number |
|
|
11018331 |
Dec 21, 2004 |
|
|
|
09859261 |
May 17, 2001 |
|
|
|
6878363 |
|
|
|
|
60204685 |
May 17, 2000 |
|
|
|
Current U.S.
Class: |
424/1.11 |
Current CPC
Class: |
A61K 51/0468
20130101 |
Class at
Publication: |
424/001.11 |
International
Class: |
A61K 051/00 |
Claims
What is claimed is:
1. A method for diagnosing a neurological disease involving APP
processing and/or the production of beta-amyloid production within
a mammalian body comprising: (c) administering a diagnostically
effective amount of a radiopharmaceutical inhibitor of APP
processing and/or the production of beta-amyloid production; and
(d) imaging the area of the patient wherein the disease is
located.
2. The method of claim 1 wherein the radiopharmaceutical comprises
technetium-99m, indium-111, or gallium-68.
3. The method of claim 1 wherein the radiopharmaceutical comprises
technetium-99m.
4. The method of claim 1 wherein the radiopharmaceutical is a
compound of Formula II:
Q.sup.3-L.sub.n-C.sub.h-M.sub.t-A.sub.L1-A.sub.L2 (II) wherein
Q.sup.3 is an inhibitor of APP processing and/or an inhibitor of
beta-amyloid production; L.sub.n is a linking group; C.sub.h is a
radionuclide metal chelator coordinated to a transition metal
radionuclide M.sub.t; M.sub.t is a transition metal radionuclide;
A.sub.L1 is a first ancillary ligand; and A.sub.L2 is a second
ancillary ligand capable of stabilizing the radiopharmaceutical;
and pharmaceutically acceptable salts thereof.
5. The method of claim 4 wherein Q.sup.3 is a radical of a compound
of formula (I): 80wherein: Q is --NH.sub.2; R.sup.3 is
C.sub.1-C.sub.6 alkyl substituted with 0-1 R.sup.4; R.sup.4 is H,
OH, C.sub.1-C.sub.6 alkoxy, C.sub.1-C.sub.6 alkyl, C.sub.2-C.sub.6
alkenyl, C.sub.2-C.sub.6 alkynyl, C.sub.3-C.sub.10 carbocycle,
C.sub.6-C.sub.10 aryl, or 5 to 10 membered heterocycle; R.sup.5 is
H, OR.sup.14; C.sub.1-C.sub.6 alkyl substituted with 0-3 R.sup.5b;
C.sub.1-C.sub.6 alkoxy substituted with 0-3 R.sup.5b;
C.sub.2-C.sub.6 alkenyl substituted with 0-3 R.sup.5b;
C.sub.2-C.sub.6 alkynyl substituted with 0-3 R.sup.5b;
C.sub.3-C.sub.10 carbocycle substituted with 0-3 R.sup.5c;
C.sub.6-C.sub.10 aryl substituted with 0-3 R.sup.5c; or 5 to 10
membered heterocycle substituted with 0-3 R.sup.5c; R.sup.5b, at
each occurrence, is independently selected from: H, C.sub.1-C.sub.6
alkyl, CF.sub.3, OR.sup.14, Cl, F, Br, I, .dbd.O, CN, NO.sub.2,
NR.sup.15R.sup.16; C.sub.3-C.sub.10 carbocycle substituted with 0-3
R.sup.5c; C.sub.6-C.sub.10 aryl substituted with 0-3 R.sup.5c; or 5
to 10 membered heterocycle substituted with 0-3 R.sup.5c; R.sup.5c,
at each occurrence, is independently selected from H, OH,
C.sub.1-C.sub.6 alkyl, C.sub.1-C.sub.4 alkoxy, Cl, F, Br, I, CN,
NO.sub.2, NR.sup.15R.sup.16, or CF.sub.3; R.sup.6 is H;
C.sub.1-C.sub.6 alkyl substituted with 0-3 R.sup.6a;
C.sub.3-C.sub.10 carbocycle substituted with 0-3 R.sup.6b; or
C.sub.6-C.sub.10 aryl substituted with 0-3 R.sup.6b; R.sup.6a, at
each occurrence, is independently selected from H, C.sub.1-C.sub.6
alkyl, OR.sup.14, Cl, F, Br, I, .dbd.O, CN, NO.sub.2,
NR.sup.15R.sup.16, phenyl or CF.sub.3; R.sup.6b, at each
occurrence, is independently selected from H, OH, C.sub.1-C.sub.6
alkyl, C.sub.1-C.sub.4 alkoxy, Cl, F, Br, I, CN, NO.sub.2,
NR.sup.15R.sup.16, or CF.sub.3; W is --(CR.sup.8R.sup.8a).sub.p-
--; p is 0 to 4; R.sup.8 and R.sup.8a, at each occurrence, are
independently selected from H, C.sub.1-C.sub.4 alkyl,
C.sub.2-C.sub.4 alkenyl, C.sub.2-C.sub.4 alkynyl and
C.sub.3-C.sub.8 cycloalkyl; X is a bond; C.sub.6-C.sub.10 aryl
substituted with 0-3 R.sup.Xb; C.sub.3-C.sub.10 carbocycle
substituted with 0-3 R.sup.Xb; or 5 to 10 membered heterocycle
substituted with 0-3 R.sup.Xb; R.sup.Xb, at each occurrence, is
independently selected from H, OH, C.sub.1-C.sub.6 alkyl,
C.sub.1-C.sub.4 alkoxy, Cl, F, Br, I, CN, NO.sub.2,
NR.sup.15R.sup.16, or CF.sub.3; Y is a bond or
--(CR.sup.9R.sup.9a).sub.t--V--(CR.sup.9R.sup.9a- ).sub.u--; t is 0
to 3; u is 0 to 3; R.sup.9 and R.sup.9a, at each occurrence, are
independently selected from H, C.sub.1-C.sub.6 alkyl or
C.sub.3-C.sub.8 cycloalkyl; V is a bond, --C(.dbd.O)--, --O--,
--S--, --S(.dbd.O)--, --S(.dbd.O).sub.2--,
--N(R.sup.19)--C(.dbd.O)NR.sup.9b--, --NR.sup.19bC(.dbd.O)--,
--NR.sup.19bS(.dbd.O).sub.2--, --S(.dbd.O).sub.2NR.sup.19b--,
--NR.sup.19bS(.dbd.O)--, --S(.dbd.O)NR.sup.19b--, --C(.dbd.O)O--,
or --OC(.dbd.O)--; Z is H; C.sub.1-C.sub.8 alkyl substituted with
0-2 R.sup.12; C.sub.2-C.sub.4 alkenyl substituted with 0-2
R.sup.12; C.sub.2-C.sub.4 alkynyl substituted with 0-2 R.sup.12;
C.sub.6-C.sub.10 aryl substituted with 0-4 R.sup.12b;
C.sub.3-C.sub.10 carbocycle substituted with 0-4 R.sup.12b; or 5 to
10 membered heterocycle substituted with 0-3 R.sup.12b; R.sup.12 is
C.sub.6-C.sub.10 aryl substituted with 0-4 R.sup.12b;
C.sub.3-C.sub.10 carbocycle substituted with 0-4 R.sup.12b; or 5 to
10 membered heterocycle substituted with 0-3 R.sup.12b; R.sup.12b,
at each occurrence, is independently selected from H, OH,
C.sub.1-C.sub.6 alkyl, C.sub.1-C.sub.4 alkoxy, Cl, F, Br, I, CN,
NO.sub.2, NR.sup.15R.sup.16, or CF.sub.3; B is a 5 to 10 membered
lactam, wherein the lactam is saturated, partially saturated or
unsaturated; wherein each additional lactam carbon is substituted
with 0-2 R.sup.11; and, optionally, the lactam contains a
heteroatom selected from --O--, --S--, --S(.dbd.O)--,
--S(.dbd.O).sub.2--, --N.dbd. and --N(R.sup.10)--; R.sup.10 is H,
C(.dbd.O)R.sup.17, C(.dbd.O)OR.sup.17, C(.dbd.O)NR.sup.18R.sup.19,
S(.dbd.O).sub.2NR.sup.18R.sup.19, S(.dbd.O).sub.2R.sup.17;
C.sub.1-C.sub.6 alkyl optionally substituted with R.sup.10a;
C.sub.6-C.sub.10 aryl substituted with 0-4 R.sup.10b;
C.sub.3-C.sub.10 carbocycle substituted with 0-3 R.sup.10b; or 5 to
10 membered heterocycle optionally substituted with 0-3 R.sup.10b;
R.sup.10a, at each occurrence, is independently selected from H,
C.sub.1-C.sub.6 alkyl, C.sub.3-C.sub.6 cycloalkyl, OR.sup.14, Cl,
F, Br, I, .dbd.O, CN, NO.sub.2, NR.sup.15R.sup.16, phenyl or
CF.sub.3; R.sup.10b, at each occurrence, is independently selected
from H, OH, C.sub.1-C.sub.6 alkyl, C.sub.1-C.sub.4 alkoxy, Cl, F,
Br, I, CN, NO.sub.2, NR.sup.15R.sup.16, or CF.sub.3; R.sup.11 is
C.sub.1-C.sub.4 alkoxy, Cl, F, Br, I, .dbd.O, CN, NO.sub.2,
NR.sup.18R.sup.19, C(.dbd.O)R.sup.17, C(.dbd.O)OR.sup.17,
C(.dbd.O)NR.sup.18R.sup.19, S(.dbd.O).sub.2NR.sup.18R.sup.19,
CF.sub.3; C.sub.1-C.sub.6 alkyl optionally substituted with
R.sub.11a; C.sub.6-C.sub.10 aryl substituted with 0-3 R.sup.11b;
C.sub.3-C.sub.10 carbocycle substituted with 0-3 R.sup.11b; or 5 to
10 membered heterocycle substituted with 0-3 R.sup.11b;
alternatively, two R.sup.11 substituents on the same carbon atoms
may be combined to form a C.sub.3-C.sub.6 carbocycle;
alternatively, two R.sup.11 substituents on adjacent carbon atoms
may be combined to form a C.sub.3-C.sub.6 carbocycle or a benzo
fused radical, wherein said benzo fused radical is substituted with
0-3 R.sup.13; R.sup.11a, at each occurrence, is independently
selected from H, C.sub.1-C.sub.6 alkyl, OR.sup.14, Cl, F, Br, I,
.dbd.O, CN, NO.sub.2, NR.sup.15R.sup.16, phenyl or CF.sub.3;
R.sup.11b, at each occurrence, is independently selected from H,
OH, C.sub.1-C.sub.6 alkyl, C.sub.1-C.sub.4 alkoxy, Cl, F, Br, I,
CN, NO.sub.2, NR.sup.15R.sup.16, or CF.sub.3; R.sup.13, at each
occurrence, is independently selected from H, OH, C.sub.1-C.sub.6
alkyl, C.sub.1-C.sub.4 alkoxy, Cl, F, Br, I, CN, NO.sub.2,
NR.sup.15R.sup.16, or CF.sub.3; R.sup.14 is H, phenyl, benzyl,
C.sub.1-C.sub.6 alkyl, or C.sub.2-C.sub.6 alkoxyalkyl; R.sup.15, at
each occurrence, is independently selected from H, C.sub.1-C.sub.6
alkyl, benzyl, phenethyl, --C(.dbd.O)--(C.sub.1-C.sub.6 alkyl) and
--S(.dbd.O).sub.2--(C.sub.1-C.su- b.6 alkyl); R.sup.16, at each
occurrence, is independently selected from H, OH, C.sub.1-C.sub.6
alkyl, benzyl, phenethyl, --C(.dbd.O)--(C.sub.1-C.- sub.6 alkyl)
and --S(.dbd.O).sub.2--(C.sub.1-C.sub.6 alkyl); R.sup.17 is H,
phenyl, benzyl, C.sub.1-C.sub.6 alkyl, or C.sub.2-C.sub.6
alkoxyalkyl; R.sup.18, at each occurrence, is independently
selected from H, C.sub.1-C.sub.6 alkyl, benzyl, phenethyl,
--C(.dbd.O)--(C.sub.1-C.sub.6 alkyl) and
--S(.dbd.O).sub.2--(C.sub.1-C.sub.6 alkyl); and R.sup.19, at each
occurrence, is independently selected from H, OH, C.sub.1-C.sub.6
alkyl, phenyl, benzyl, phenethyl, --C(.dbd.O)--(C.sub.1-C.sub.6
alkyl) and --S(.dbd.O).sub.2--(C.sub.1-C.sub.6 alkyl); R.sup.19b is
H, C.sub.1-C.sub.6 alkyl, C.sub.3-C.sub.8 cycloalkyl, phenyl,
benzyl or phenethyl; and R.sup.20 is H or C.sub.1-C.sub.6
alkyl.
6. The method of claim 4 wherein Q.sup.3 is an inhibitor of
beta-amyloid production selected from the group consisting of: (1)
an inhibitor of presenilin-1; (2) an inhibitor of presenilin-2; (3)
an inhibitor of .beta. secretase; (4) an inhibitor of .alpha.
secretase; (5) an inhibitor of .gamma. secretase; and (6) an
inhibitor of BACE/memapsin 2.
7. The method of claim 4 wherein Q.sup.3 is an inhibitor of
beta-amyloid production which is identified by the method of
sceening for inhibitors of beta-amyloid production comprising, 1)
contacting a potential inhibitor of beta-amyloid production and a
tagged inhibitor of beta-amyloid production with at least one
macromolecule involved in the processing of APP and the production
of beta-amyloid peptide, said macromolecule containing a binding
site specific for said tagged inhibitor of beta-amyloid production;
2) separating the tagged inhibitor of beta-amyloid production bound
to said macromolecule from the tagged inhibitor of beta-amyloid
production free from said macromolecule; and 3) determining an
inhibitory concentration of the potential inhibitor of beta-amyloid
production from the concentration of tagged inhibitor of
beta-amyloid production bound to said macromolecule.
8. The method of claim 4 wherein L.sub.n is a linking group of
about 5 Angstroms to about 10,000 Angstroms in length.
9. The method of claim 4 wherein L.sub.n is a linking group of the
formula -M.sup.31-Y.sup.31
(CR.sup.31R.sup.32).sub.f(Z.sup.1).sub.f"Y.sup.32-M.su- p.32-;
wherein M.sup.31 is
--[(CH.sub.2gZ.sup.31].sub.g'-(CR.sup.31R.sup.3- 2).sub.g"--;
M.sup.32 is --(CR.sup.31R.sup.32).sub.g"-[Z.sup.31(CH.sub.2).-
sub.g].sub.g'--; g is independently 0-10; g' is independently 0-1;
g" is independently 0-10; f is independently 0-10; f' is
independently 0-10; f" is independently 0-1; Y.sup.31 and Y.sup.32,
at each occurrence, are independently selected from: a direct bond,
--O--, --NR.sup.32--, --C(.dbd.O)--, --C(.dbd.O)O--,
--OC(.dbd.O)O--, --C(.dbd.O)NH--, --C(.dbd.NR.sup.32)--, --S--,
--SO--, --SO.sub.2--, --SO.sub.3--, --NHC(.dbd.O)--,
--(NH).sub.2C(.dbd.O)--, --(NH).sub.2C.dbd.S--; Z.sup.31 is
independently selected at each occurrence from a (C.sub.6-C.sub.14)
saturated, partially saturated, or aromatic carbocyclic ring
system, substituted with 0-4 R.sup.33; and a heterocyclic ring
system, optionally substituted with 0-4 R.sup.33; R.sup.31 and
R.sup.32 are independently selected at each occurrence from:
hydrogen; (C.sub.1-C.sub.10)alkyl substituted with 0-5 R.sup.33;
alkaryl wherein the aryl is substituted with 0-5 R.sup.33; R.sup.33
is independently selected at each occurrence from the group:
hydrogen, --OH, --NHR.sup.34, --C(.dbd.O)R.sup.34,
--OC(.dbd.O)R.sup.34, --OC(.dbd.O)OR.sup.34, --C(.dbd.O)OR.sup.34,
--C(.dbd.O)NR.sup.34, --CN, --SR.sup.34, --SOR.sup.34,
--SO.sub.2R.sup.34, --NHC(.dbd.O)R.sup.34, --NHC(.dbd.O)NHR.sup.34,
or --NHC(.dbd.S)NHR.sup.34; and R.sup.34 is independently selected
at each occurrence from the group: hydrogen;
(C.sub.1-C.sub.6)alkyl; benzyl, and phenyl.
10. The method of claim 4 wherein: L.sub.n is a linking group of
the formula --R.sup.35-G-R.sup.36--; R.sup.35 and R.sup.36 are each
independently --N(R.sup.37)C(.dbd.O)--, --C(.dbd.O)N(R.sup.37)--,
--OC(.dbd.O)--, --C(.dbd.O)O--, --, --S--, --S(O)--, --SO.sub.2--,
--NR.sup.37--, --C(.dbd.O)--, or a direct bond; each R.sup.37 is
independently H or (C.sub.1-C.sub.6)alkyl; G is
(C.sub.1-C.sub.24)alkyl substituted with 0-3 R.sup.38, cycloalkyl
substituted with 0-3 R.sup.38, aryl substituted with 0-3 R.sup.38,
or heterocycle substituted with 0-3 R.sup.38; R.sup.38 is .dbd.O,
F, Cl, Br, I, --CF.sub.3, --CN, --CO.sub.2R.sup.39,
--C(.dbd.O)R.sup.39, --C(.dbd.O)N(R.sup.39).sub.2, --CHO,
--CH.sub.2OR.sup.39, --OC(.dbd.O)R.sup.39, --OC(.dbd.O)OR.sup.40,
--OR.sup.39, --OC(.dbd.O)N(R.sup.39).sub.2,
--NR.sup.39C(.dbd.O)R.sup.39, --NR.sup.41C(.dbd.O)OR.sup.40,
--NR.sup.39C(.dbd.O)N(R.sup.39).sub.2,
--NR.sup.39SO.sub.2N(R.sup.39).sub.2, --NR.sup.41SO.sub.2R.sup.40,
--SO.sub.3H, --SO.sub.2R.sup.40, --SR.sup.39, --S(.dbd.O)R.sup.40,
--SO.sub.2N(R.sup.39).sub.2, --N(R.sup.39).sub.2,
--NHC(.dbd.NH)NHR.sup.3- 9, --C(.dbd.NH)NHR.sup.39,
.dbd.NOR.sup.39, --NO.sub.2, --C(.dbd.O)NHOR.sup.39,
--C(.dbd.O)NHNR.sup.39R.sup.40, or --OCH.sub.2CO.sub.2H; R.sup.39,
R.sup.40, and R.sup.41 are each independently selected at each
occurrence from the group: a direct bond, H, and
(C.sub.1-C.sub.6)alkyl.
11. The method of claim 4 wherein: C.sub.h is selected from the
group: --R.sup.42N.dbd.N.sup.+.dbd., --R.sup.42R.sup.43N--N.dbd.,
--R.sup.42N.dbd., and --R.sup.42N.dbd.N(H)--, wherein R.sup.42 is a
direct bond, (C.sub.1-C.sub.10)alkyl substituted with 0-3 R.sup.44,
aryl substituted with 0-3 R.sup.44, cycloaklyl substituted with 0-3
R.sup.44, heterocycle substituted with 0-3 R.sup.44,
heterocycloalkyl substituted with 0-3 R.sup.44, aralkyl substituted
with 0-3 R.sup.44, or alkaryl substituted with 0-3 R.sup.44;
R.sup.43 is hydrogen, aryl substituted with 0-3 R.sup.44,
(C.sub.1-C.sub.10)alkyl substituted with 0-3 R.sup.44, and a
heterocycle substituted with 0-3 R.sup.44; R.sup.44 is a direct
bond, .dbd.O, F, Cl, Br, I, --CF.sub.3, --CN, --CO.sub.2R.sup.45,
--C(.dbd.O)R.sup.45, --C(.dbd.O)N(R.sup.45).sub.2, --CHO,
--CH.sub.2OR.sup.45, --OC(.dbd.O)R.sup.45, --OC(.dbd.O)OR.sup.46,
--OR.sup.45, --OC(.dbd.O)N(R.sup.45).sub.2,
--NR.sup.45C(.dbd.O)R.sup.45, --NR.sup.47C(.dbd.O)OR.sup.46,
--NR.sup.45C(.dbd.O)N(R.sup.45).sub.2,
--NR.sup.45SO.sub.2N(R.sup.45).sub.2, --NR.sup.47SO.sub.2R.sup.46,
--SO.sub.3H, --SO.sub.2R.sup.46, --SR.sup.45, --S(.dbd.O)R.sup.46,
--SO.sub.2N(R.sup.45).sub.2, --N(R.sup.45).sub.2,
--NHC(.dbd.NH)NHR.sup.4- 5, --C(.dbd.NH)NHR.sup.45,
.dbd.NOR.sup.45, NO.sub.2, --C(.dbd.O)NHOR.sup.45,
--C(.dbd.O)NHNR.sup.45R.sup.46, or --OCH.sub.2CO.sub.2H; R.sup.45,
R.sup.46, and R.sup.47 are each independently selected at each
occurrence from the group: a direct bond, H, and
(C.sub.1-C.sub.6)alkyl.
12. The method of claim 4 wherein C.sub.h is 81and is attached to
L.sub.n at the carbon designated with a *.
13. The method of claim 4 wherein M.sub.t is technetium-99m.
14. The method of claim 4 wherein M.sub.t is rhenium-186.
15. The method of claim 4 wherein M.sub.t is rhenium-188.
16. The method of claim 4 wherein A.sub.L1 is a halide, a dioxygen
ligand, or a functionalized aminocarboxylate.
17. The method of claim 4 wherein A.sub.L1 is tricine.
18. The method of claim 4 wherein: A.sub.L2 is selected from the
group: -A.sup.31 and -A.sup.32-W-A.sup.33; A.sup.31 is
--PR.sup.91R.sup.92R.sup.- 93 or --AsR.sup.91R.sup.92R.sup.93;
A.sup.32 and A.sup.33 are each independently --PR.sup.91R.sup.92 or
--AsR.sup.91R.sup.92; W is a spacer group selected from the group:
(C.sub.1-C.sub.10)alkyl substituted with 0-3 R.sup.94, aryl
substituted with 0-3 R.sup.94, cycloaklyl substituted with 0-3
R.sup.94, heterocycle substituted with 0-3 R.sup.94,
heterocycloalkyl substituted with 0-3 R.sup.94, aralkyl substituted
with 0-3 R.sup.94 and alkaryl substituted with 0-3 R.sup.94;
R.sup.91, R.sup.92, and R.sup.93 are independently selected at each
occurrence from the group: (C.sub.1-C.sub.10)alkyl substituted with
0-3 R.sup.94, aryl substituted with 0-3 R.sup.94, cycloalkyl
substituted with 0-3 R.sup.94, heterocycle substituted with 0-3
R.sup.94, aralkyl substituted with 0-3 R.sup.94, alkaryl
substituted with 0-3 R.sup.94, and arylalkaryl substituted with 0-3
R.sup.94; R.sup.94 is independently selected at each occurrence
from the group: F, Cl, Br, I, --CF.sub.3, --CN, --CO.sub.2R.sup.95,
--C(.dbd.O)R.sup.95, --C(.dbd.C)N(R.sup.95).sub.2,
--CH.sub.2OR.sup.95, --OC(.dbd.O)R.sup.95, --OC(.dbd.O)OR.sup.96,
--OR.sup.95, --OC(.dbd.O)N(R.sup.95).sub.2,
--NR.sup.95C(.dbd.O)R.sup.95, --NR.sup.95C(.dbd.O)OR.sup.95,
--NR.sup.95C(.dbd.O)N(R.sup.95).sub.2, SO.sub.3.sup.-,
--NR.sup.95SO.sub.2N(R.sup.95).sub.2, --NR.sup.95SO.sub.2R.sup.96,
--SO.sub.3H, --SO.sub.2R.sup.95, --S(.dbd.O)R.sup.95,
--SO.sub.2N(R.sup.95).sub.2, --N(R.sup.95).sub.2,
--N(R.sup.95).sub.3.sup.+, --NHC(.dbd.NH)NHR.sup.95,
--C(.dbd.NH)NHR.sup.95, .dbd.NOR.sup.95, --NO.sub.2,
--C(.dbd.O)NHOR.sup.95, --C(.dbd.O)NHNR.sup.95R.sup.96, and
--OCH.sub.2CO.sub.2H; and R.sup.95 and R.sup.96 are independently
selected at each occurrence from the group: hydrogen and
(C.sub.1-C.sub.6)alkyl.
19. The method of claim 4 wherein A.sub.L2 is an ancillary ligand
selected from the group: 82wherein n is 0 or 1; X.sup.1c is
independently selected at each occurrence from the group: CR.sup.84
and N; X.sup.2c is independently selected at each occurrence from
the group: CR.sup.84, CR.sup.84R.sup.84, N, NR.sup.84, O and S;
X.sup.3c is independently selected at each occurrence from the
group: C, CR.sup.84, and N; provided the total number of
heteroatoms in each ring of the ligand A.sub.L2 is 1 to 4; Y.sup.3
is selected from the group: BR.sup.84-, CR.sup.84, (P.dbd.O),
(P.dbd.S); and a, b, c, d, e and f indicate the positions of
optional double bonds, provided that one of e and f is a double
bond; R.sup.64 is independently selected at each occurrence from
the group: H, (C.sub.1-C.sub.10)alkyl substituted with 0-3
R.sup.85, (C.sub.2-C.sub.10)alkenyl substituted with 0-3 R.sup.85,
(C.sub.2-C.sub.10)alkynyl substituted with 0-3 R.sup.85, aryl
substituted with 0-3 R.sup.85, carbocycle substituted with 0-3
R.sup.85, and R.sup.85; or, alternatively, two R.sup.84 may be
taken together with the atom or atoms to which they are attached to
form a fused aromatic, carbocyclic or heterocyclic ring,
substituted with 0-3 R.sup.85; R.sup.85 is independently selected
at each occurrence from the group: .dbd.O, F, Cl, Br, I,
--CF.sub.3, --CN, --NO.sub.2, --CO.sub.2R.sup.86,
--C(.dbd.O)R.sup.86, --C(.dbd.O)N(R.sup.86).sub.2,
--N(R.sup.86).sub.3.sup.+--CH.sub.2OR.sup.86, --OC(.dbd.O)R.sup.86,
--OC(.dbd.O)OR.sup.86a, --OR.sup.86, --OC(.dbd.O)N(R.sup.86).sub.2,
--NR.sup.86C(.dbd.O)R.sup.86, NR.sup.87C(.dbd.O)OR.sup.86a,
--NR.sup.86C(.dbd.O)N(R.sup.86).sub.2,
--NR.sup.87SO.sub.2N(R.sup.86).sub- .2,
--NR.sup.87SO.sub.2R.sup.86a, --SO.sub.3H, --SO.sub.2R.sup.86a,
--SO.sub.2N(R.sup.86).sub.2, --N(R.sup.86).sub.2,
--OCH.sub.2CO.sub.2H; and R.sup.86, R.sup.86a, and R.sup.87 are
each independently selected at each occurrence from the group:
hydrogen and (C.sub.1-C.sub.6)alkyl.
20. The method of claim 4 wherein A.sub.L2 is
--PR.sup.48R.sup.49R.sup.50.
21. The method of claim 20 wherein R.sup.48, R.sup.49, and R.sup.50
are each aryl substituted with one R.sup.51 substituent.
22. The method of claim 21 wherein each aryl is phenyl.
23. The method of claim 21 wherein each R.sup.51 substituent is
SO.sub.3H or SO.sub.3.sup.-, in the meta position.
24. The method of claim 4 wherein the radiopharmaceutical is a
compound of Formula V: Q.sup.3-L.sub.n-C.sub.h-M.sub.t (V) wherein
Q.sup.3 is an inhibitor of APP processing and/or the production of
beta-amyloid production; L.sub.n is a linking group of the formula
-M.sup.31-Y.sup.31
(CR.sup.31R.sup.32).sub.f(Z.sup.1).sub.f"Y.sup.32-M.sup.32-;
wherein M.sup.31 is
--[(CH.sub.2gZ.sup.31].sub.g'-(CR.sup.31R.sup.32).sub.g"--;
M.sup.32 is
--(CR.sup.31R.sup.32).sub.g"-[Z.sup.31(CH.sub.2).sub.g].sub.g- '--;
g is independently 0-10; g' is independently 0-1; g" is
independently 0-10; f is independently 0-10; f' is independently
0-10; f" is independently 0-1; Y.sup.31 and Y.sup.32, at each
occurrence, are independently selected from: a direct bond, --O--,
--NR.sup.32--, --C(.dbd.O)--, --C(.dbd.O)O--, --OC(.dbd.O)O--,
--C(.dbd.O)NH--, --C(.dbd.NR.sup.32)--, --S--, --SO--,
--SO.sub.2--, --SO.sub.3--, --NHC(.dbd.O)--,
--(NH).sub.2C(.dbd.O)--, --(NH).sub.2C.dbd.S--; Z.sup.31 is
independently selected at each occurrence from a (C.sub.6-C.sub.14)
saturated, partially saturated, or aromatic carbocyclic ring
system, substituted with 0-4 R.sup.33; and a heterocyclic ring
system, optionally substituted with 0-4 R.sup.33; R.sup.31 and
R.sup.32 are independently selected at each occurrence from:
hydrogen; (C.sub.1-C.sub.10)alkyl substituted with 0-5 R.sup.33;
alkaryl wherein the aryl is substituted with 0-5 R.sup.33; R.sup.33
is independently selected at each occurrence from the group:
hydrogen, --OH, --NHR.sup.34, --C(.dbd.O)R.sup.34,
--OC(.dbd.O)R.sup.34, --OC(.dbd.O)OR.sup.34, --C(.dbd.O)OR.sup.34,
--C(.dbd.O)NR.sup.34, --CN, --SR.sup.34, --SOR.sup.34,
--SO.sub.2R.sup.34, --NHC(.dbd.O)R.sup.34, --NHC(.dbd.O)NHR.sup.34,
or --NHC(.dbd.S)NHR.sup.34; and R.sup.34 is independently selected
at each occurrence from the group: hydrogen;
(C.sub.1-C.sub.6)alkyl; benzyl, and phenyl; C.sub.h is a
radionuclide metal chelator coordinated to a transition metal
radionuclide M.sub.t; M.sub.t is a transition metal radionuclide;
and pharmaceutically acceptable salts thereof.
25. The method of claim 24 wherein C.sub.h is selected from the
group: 83wherein: A.sup.1, A.sup.2, A.sup.3, A.sup.4, A.sup.5,
A.sup.6, and A.sup.7 are independently selected at each occurrence
from the group: NR.sup.60R.sup.61, S, SH, S(Pg), O, OH,
PR.sup.62R.sup.63, P(O)R.sup.62R.sup.73, P(S)R.sup.62R.sup.63,
P(NR.sup.67)R.sup.62R.sup.63; J is a direct bond, CH, or a spacer
group selected from the group: (C.sub.1-C.sub.10)alkyl substituted
with 0-3 R.sup.72, aryl substituted with 0-3 R.sup.72, cycloaklyl
substituted with 0-3 R.sup.72, heterocycloalkyl substituted with
0-3 R.sup.72, aralkyl substituted with 0-3 R.sup.72 and alkaryl
substituted with 0-3 R.sup.72; R.sup.60, R.sup.61, R.sup.62,
R.sup.63, and R.sup.64 are each independently selected from the
group: a direct bond, hydrogen, (C.sub.1-C.sub.10)alkyl substituted
with 0-3 R.sup.72, aryl substituted with 0-3 R.sup.72, cycloaklyl
substituted with 0-3 R.sup.72, heterocycloalkyl substituted with
0-3 R.sup.72, aralkyl substituted with 0-3 R.sup.72, alkaryl
substituted with 0-3 R.sup.72substituted with 0-3 R.sup.72 and an
electron, provided that when one of R.sup.70 or R.sup.71 is an
electron, then the other is also an electron, and provided that
when one of R.sup.72 or R.sup.73 is an electron, then the other is
also an electron; additionally, R.sup.60 and R.sup.61 may combine
to form .dbd.C(C.sub.1-C.sub.3)alkyl (C.sub.1-C.sub.3)alkyl;
R.sup.72 is independently selected at each occurrence from the
group: a direct bond, .dbd.O, F, Cl, Br, I, --CF.sub.3, --CN,
--CO.sub.2R.sup.73, --C(.dbd.O)R.sup.73,
--C(.dbd.O)N(R.sup.73).sub.2, --CHO, --CH.sub.2OR.sup.73,
--OC(.dbd.O)R.sup.73, --OC(.dbd.O)OR.sup.73a, --OR.sup.73,
--OC(.dbd.O)N(R.sup.73).sub.2, --NR.sup.73C(.dbd.O)R.sup.73,
--NR.sup.74C(.dbd.O)OR.sup.73a,
--NR.sup.73C(.dbd.O)N(R.sup.73).sub.2,
--NR.sup.74SO.sub.2N(R.sup.73).sub.2, --NR.sup.74SO.sub.2R.sup.73a,
--SO.sub.3H, --SO.sub.2R.sup.73a, --SR.sup.73,
--S(.dbd.O)R.sup.73a, --SO.sub.2N(R.sup.73).sub.2,
--N(R.sup.73).sub.2, --NHC(.dbd.NH)NHR.sup.7- 3,
--C(.dbd.NH)NHR.sup.73, .dbd.NOR.sup.73, NO.sub.2,
--C(.dbd.O)NHOR.sup.73, --C(.dbd.O)NHNR.sup.73R.sup.73a,
--OCH.sub.2CO.sub.2H, 2-(1-morpholino)ethoxy,
(C.sub.1-C.sub.5)alkyl, (C.sub.2-C.sub.4)alkenyl,
(C.sub.3-C.sub.6)cycloalkyl, (C.sub.3-C.sub.6)cycloalkylmethyl,
(C.sub.2-C.sub.6)alkoxyalkyl, aryl substituted with 0-2 R.sup.73, a
5-10-membered heterocyclic ring system containing 1-4 heteroatoms
independently selected from N, S, and O; R.sup.73, R.sup.73a, and
R.sup.74 are independently selected at each occurrence from the
group: a direct bond, (C.sub.1-C.sub.6)alkyl, phenyl, benzyl,
(C.sub.1-C.sub.6)alkoxy, halide, nitro, cyano, and trifluoromethyl;
and Pg is a thiol protecting group capable of being displaced upon
reaction with a radionuclide.
26. The method of claim 24 wherein C.sub.h is selected from the
group: diethylenetriamine-pentaacetic acid (DTPA);
ethylenediamine-tetraacetic acid (EDTA);
1,4,7,10-tetraazacyclododecane-N,N',N",N'"-tetraacetic acid (DOTA);
1,4,7,10-tetraaza-cyclododecane-N,N',N"-triacetic acid;
hydroxybenzyl-ethylene-diamine diacetic acid;
N,N'-bis(pyridoxyl-5-phosph- ate)ethylene diamine; N,N'-diacetate,
3,6,9-triaza-12-oxa-3,6,9-tricarboxy-
methylene-10-carboxy-13-phenyl-tridecanoic acid;
1,4,7-triazacyclononane-N- ,N',N"-triacetic acid;
1,4,8,11-tetraazacyclo-tetradecane-N,N'N"N'"-tetraa- cetic acid;
2,3-bis(S-benzoyl)mercaptoacetamido-propanoic acid.
27. The method of claim 24 wherein M.sub.t is indium-111 or
gallium-68.
28. A method for claim 4 wherein the neurological disease is
Alzheimer's disease.
29. A method for diagnosising a neurological disease involving APP
processing and/or the production of beta-amyloid production within
a mammalian body comprising: (a) administering a diagnostically
effective amount of an ultrasound contrast agent composition
inhibitor of APP processing and/or the production of beta-amyloid
production; and (b) imaging the area of the patient wherein the
disease is located.
30. A method for diagnosising a neurological disease according to
claim 29, wherein the an ultrasound contrast agent composition is
of the formula Q.sup.3-L.sub.n-C.sub.h-S.sub.f wherein Q.sup.3 is
an inhibitor of APP processing and/or the production of
beta-amyloid production; L.sub.n is a linking group of the formula
-M.sup.31-Y.sup.31
(CR.sup.31R.sup.32).sub.f(Z.sup.1).sub.f"Y.sup.32-M.sup.32-;
wherein M.sup.31 is
--[(CH.sub.2gZ.sup.31].sub.g'-(CR.sup.31R.sup.32).sub.g"--;
M.sup.32 is
--(CR.sup.31R.sup.32).sub.g"-[Z.sup.31(CH.sub.2).sub.g].sub.g- '--;
g is independently 0-10; g' is independently 0-1; g" is
independently 0-10; f is independently 0-10; f' is independently
0-10; f" is independently 0-1; Y.sup.31 and Y.sup.32, at each
occurrence, are independently selected from: a direct bond, --O--,
--NR.sup.32--, --C(.dbd.O)--, --C(.dbd.O)O--, OC(.dbd.O)O--,
--C(.dbd.O)NH--, --C(.dbd.NR.sup.32)--, --S--, --SO--,
--SO.sub.2--, SO.sub.3--, --NHC(.dbd.O)--, --(NH).sub.2C(.dbd.O)--,
--(NH).sub.2C.dbd.S--; Z.sup.31 is independently selected at each
occurrence from a (C.sub.6-C.sub.14) saturated, partially
saturated, or aromatic carbocyclic ring system, substituted with
0-4 R.sup.33; and a heterocyclic ring system, optionally
substituted with 0-4 R.sup.33; R.sup.31 and R.sup.32 are
independently selected at each occurrence from: hydrogen;
(C.sub.1-C.sub.10)alkyl substituted with 0-5 R.sup.33; alkaryl
wherein the aryl is substituted with 0-5 R.sup.33; R.sup.33 is
independently selected at each occurrence from the group: hydrogen,
--OH, --NHR.sup.34, --C(.dbd.O)R.sup.34, --OC(.dbd.O)R.sup.34,
OC(.dbd.O)OR.sup.34, --C(.dbd.O)OR.sup.34, --C(.dbd.O)NR.sup.34,
--CN, --SR.sup.34, --SOR.sup.34, --SO.sub.2R.sup.34,
--NHC(.dbd.O)R.sup.34, --NHC(.dbd.O)NHR.sup.34, or
--NHC(.dbd.S)NHR.sup.34; and R.sup.34 is independently selected at
each occurrence from the group: hydrogen; (C.sub.1-C.sub.6)alkyl;
benzyl, and phenyl; S.sub.f is a surfactant which is a lipid or a
compound of the formula: 84A.sup.9 is selected from the group: OH
and OR.sup.27; A.sup.10 is OR.sup.27; R.sup.27 is
C(.dbd.O)C.sub.1-20 alkyl; E.sup.1 is C.sub.1-.sub.10 alkylene
substituted with 1-3 R.sup.28; R.sup.28 is independently selected
at each occurrence from the group: R.sup.30, --PO.sub.3H--R.sup.30,
.dbd.O, --CO.sub.2R.sup.29, --C(.dbd.O)R.sup.29,
--C(.dbd.O)N(R.sup.29).sub.2, --CH.sub.2OR.sup.29, --OR.sup.29,
--N(R.sup.29).sub.2, C.sub.1-C.sub.5 alkyl, and C.sub.2-C.sub.4
alkenyl; R.sup.29 is independently selected at each occurrence from
the group: R.sup.30, H, C.sub.1-C.sub.6 alkyl, phenyl, benzyl, and
trifluoromethyl; R.sup.30 is a bond to L.sub.n; and a
pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof.
31. The method according to claim 30, wherein the ultrasound
contrast agent composition further comprises:
1,2-dipalmitoyl-sn-glycero-3-phospho- tidic acid,
1,2-dipalmitoyl-sn-glycero-3-phosphatidylcholine, and
N-(methoxypolyethylene glycol 5000
carbamoyl)-1,2-dipalmitoyl-sn-glycero--
3-phosphatidylethanolamine.
32. The method according to claim 30, wherein the ultrasound
contrast agent composition further comprises an echogenic gas.
33. The method according to claim 32, wherein the echogenic gas is
C.sub.2-5 perfluorocarbon.
34. A method of in vivo diagnostic imaging comprising administering
to a subject a diagnostically effective amount of a radiolabeled
inhibitor of beta-amyloid production.
35. A method of claim 34 wherein said method is used in the
diagnosis of a neurological disease which involves APP processing
or elevated levels of beta-amyloid, or both.
36. A method of claim 34 wherein said method is used in the
diagnosis of Alzheimer's disease.
37. A method of claim 34 wherein the radiolabeled inhibitor is
suitable for imaging of the brain of the subject.
38. A method of claim 34 wherein the radiolabeled inhibitor is
radiolabeled with one or more radioisotope selected from .sup.3H,
.sup.11C, .sup.14C, .sup.18F, .sup.32P, .sup.35S, .sup.123I,
.sup.125I, or .sup.131I.
39. A method of claim 34 wherein the inhibitor of beta-amyloid
production is a compound selected from the group consisting of 1)
any compound claimed in a reference listed in Table 2, 2) any
compound within the scope of compounds disclosed in a reference
listed in Table 2, and 3) any compound which inhibits beta-amyloid
production and binds competitively with any of the foregoing
compounds in any of the assays described in the Utility section
hereof.
40. A method of claim 34 wherein the inhibitor of beta-amyloid
production exhibits activity as an inhibitor in the method of
screening for inhibitors of beta-amyloid production comprising, 1)
contacting a potential inhibitor of beta-amyloid production and a
tagged inhibitor of beta-amyloid production with at least one
macromolecule involved in the processing of APP and the production
of beta-amyloid peptide, said macromolecule containing a binding
site specific for said tagged inhibitor of beta-amyloid production;
2) separating the tagged inhibitor of beta-amyloid production bound
to said macromolecule from the tagged inhibitor of beta-amyloid
production free from said macromolecule; and 3) determining an
inhibitory concentration of the potential inhibitor of beta-amyloid
production from the concentration of tagged inhibitor of
beta-amyloid production bound to said macromolecule.
41. A method of claim 34 wherein the inhibitor of beta-amyloid
production binds to a macromolecule which is capable of being
identified by the method of identifying a macromolecule involved in
APP processing comprising 1) contacting a tagged inhibitor of
beta-amyloid production with material suspected to contain a
macromolecule involved in APP processing; 2) separating a complex
comprising a tagged inhibitor of beta-amyloid production and a
macromolecule involved in APP processing; and 3) identifying the
complex.
42. A method of claim 34 wherein the inhibitor of beta-amyloid
production binds to a macromolecule involved in APP processing
comprising a macromolecule to which a tagged inhibitor of
beta-amyloid production binds to specifically.
43. A method of claim 34 wherein the inhibitor of beta-amyloid
production is selected from an inhibitor of beta-amyloid production
comprising a compound which interacts with a binding site on a
macromolecule involved in the production of beta-amyloid peptide;
wherein said binding site is a specific binding site for a compound
of Formula (I-7T) or (I-43T) wherein m is about 2.
44. A method of claim 34 wherein the radiolabeled inhibitor of
beta-amyloid production is a radiolabeled tagged inhibitor of
beta-amyloid production comprising a tagged compound which
interacts with a binding site on a macromolecule involved in the
production of beta-amyloid peptide; wherein said binding site is a
specific binding site for a compound of Formula (I-7T) or (I-43T)
wherein m is about 2.
45. A method of claim 34 wherein the inhibitor of beta-amyloid
production is selected from: (1) an inhibitor of presenilin-1; (2)
an inhibitor of presenilin-2; (3) an inhibitor of .beta. secretase;
(4) an inhibitor of .alpha. secretase; (5) an inhibitor of .gamma.
secretase; or (6) an inhibitor of BACE/memapsin 2.
46. A pharmaceutical composition suitable for in vivo diagnostic
imaging comprising a radiolabeled inhibitor of beta-amyloid
production.
47. A pharmaceutical composition of claim 46 wherein the
composition is used in the diagnosis of a neurological disease
which involves APP processing or elevated levels of beta-amyloid,
or both.
48. A pharmaceutical composition of claim 46 wherein the
composition is used in the diagnosis of Alzheimer's disease.
49. A pharmaceutical composition of claim 46 wherein the
radiolabeled inhibitor is suitable for imaging of the brain of the
subject.
50. A pharmaceutical composition of claim 46 wherein the
radiolabeled inhibitor is radiolabeled with one or more
radioisotope selected from .sup.3H, .sup.11C, .sup.14C, .sup.18F,
.sup.32P, .sup.35S, .sup.123I, .sup.125I, or .sup.131I.
51. A pharmaceutical composition of claim 46 wherein the inhibitor
of beta-amyloid production is a compound selected from the group
consisting of 1) any compound claimed in a reference listed in
Table 2, 2) any compound within the scope of compounds disclosed in
a reference listed in Table 2, and 3) any compound which inhibits
beta-amyloid production and binds competitively with any of the
foregoing compounds in any of the assays described in the Utility
section hereof.
52. A pharmaceutical composition of claim 46 wherein the inhibitor
of beta-amyloid production is selected from: (1) an inhibitor of
presenilin-1; (2) an inhibitor of presenilin-2; (3) an inhibitor of
.beta. secretase; (4) an inhibitor of .alpha. secretase; (5) an
inhibitor of .gamma. secretase; or (6) an inhibitor of
BACE/memapsin 2.
Description
RELATED PRIOR ART
[0001] This application is a continuation of Ser. No. 09/859,261,
filed May 17, 2001(allowed), which claims priority of provisional
application No. 60/204,685, filed May 17, 2000, which disclosure is
incorporated entirely herein by reference.
FIELD OF THE INVENTION
[0002] This invention relates to a method of using radiolabelled
and/or radiopharmaceutical small molecule inhibitors of
beta-amyloid peptide production for the diagnosis of neurological
and other disorders involving APP processing and beta-amyloid
production. Furthermore, radiolabelled small molecule inhibitors
identified by the methods of the present invention would be useful
in the diagnosis of neurological disorders, such as Alzheimer's
disease, which involve elevated levels of A.quadrature.
peptides.
BACKGROUND OF THE INVENTION
[0003] Alzheimer's disease (AD) is a degenerative brain disorder
characterized clinically by progressive loss of memory, temporal
and local orientation, cognition, reasoning, judgment and emotional
stability. AD is a common cause of progressive dementia in humans
and is one of the major causes of death in the United States. AD
has been observed in all races and ethnic groups worldwide, and is
a major present and future health problem. No treatment that
effectively prevents AD or reverses the clinical symptoms and
underlying pathophysiology is currently available (for review,
Dennis J. Selkoe; Cell Biology of the amyloid (beta)-protein
precursor and the mechanism of Alzheimer's disease, Annu Rev Cell
Biol, 1994, 10: 373-403).
[0004] Histopathological examination of brain tissue derived upon
autopsy or from neurosurgical specimens in effected individuals
revealed the occurrence of amyloid plaques and neurofibrillar
tangles in the cerebral cortex of such patients. Similar
alterations were observed in patients with Trisomy 21 (Down's
syndrome), and hereditary cerebral hemorrhage with amyloidosis of
the Dutch-type.
[0005] Neurofibrillar tangles are nonmembrane-bound bundles of
abnormal proteinaceous filaments and biochemical and immunochemical
studies led to the conclusion that their principle protein subunit
is an altered phosphorylated form of the tau protein (reviewed in
Selkoe, 1994).
[0006] Biochemical and immunological studies revealed that the
dominant proteinaceous component of the amyloid plaque is an
approximately 4.2 kilodalton (kD) protein of about 39 to 43 amino
acids. This protein was designated A.beta., .beta.-amyloid peptide,
and sometimes .beta./A4; referred to herein as A.beta.. In addition
to deposition of A.beta. in amyloid plaques, A.beta. is also found
in the walls of meningeal and parenchymal arterioles, small
arteries, capillaries, and sometimes, venules. A.beta. was first
purified, and a partial amino acid reported, in 1984 (Glenner and
Wong, Biochem. Biophys. Res. Commun. 120: 885-890). The isolation
and sequence data for the first 28 amino acids are described in
U.S. Pat. No. 4,666,829.
[0007] Compelling evidence accumulated during the last decade
revealed that A.beta. is an internal polypeptide derived from a
type 1 integral membrane protein, termed .beta. amyloid precursor
protein (APP). .beta. APP is normally produced by many cells both
in vivo and in cultured cells, derived from various animals and
humans. A.beta. is derived from cleavage of .beta. APP by as yet
unknown enzyme (protease) system(s), collectively termed
secretases.
[0008] The existence of at least four proteolytic activities has
been postulated. They include .beta. secretase(s), generating the
N-terminus of A.beta., .alpha. secretase(s) cleaving around the
16/17 peptide bond in A.beta., and .gamma. secretases, generating
C-terminal A.beta. fragments ending at position 38, 39, 40, 42, and
43 or generating C-terminal extended precursors which are
subsequently truncated to the above polypeptides.
[0009] The gene encoding a human aspartic protease that cleaves the
.beta.-secretase site of .beta.-amyloid precursor protein has
recently been isolated; this gene and encoded protein is designated
as BACE (Vassar et al., Science (1999) 286: 735-741) or as
memapsin-2 (Lin et al., PNAS (2000) 97: 1456-1460) and is
designated herein as "BACE/memapsin-2".
[0010] Several lines of evidence suggest that abnormal accumulation
of A.beta. plays a key role in the pathogenesis of AD. Firstly,
A.beta. is the major protein found in amyloid plaques. Secondly,
A.beta. is neurotoxic and may be causally related to neuronal death
observed in AD patients. Thirdly, missense DNA mutations at
position 717 in the 770 isoform of .beta. APP can be found in
effected members but not unaffected members of several families
with a genetically determined (familiar) form of AD. In addition,
several other .beta. APP mutations have been described in familial
forms of AD. Fourthly, similar neuropathological changes have been
observed in transgenic animals overexpressing mutant forms of human
.beta. APP. Fifthly, individuals with Down's syndrome have an
increased gene dosage of .beta. APP and develop early-onset AD.
Taken together, these observations strongly suggest that A.beta.
depositions may be causally related to the AD.
[0011] It is hypothesized that inhibiting the production of A.beta.
will prevent and reduce neurological degeneration, by controlling
the formation of amyloid plaques, reducing neurotoxicity and,
generally, mediating the pathology associated with A.beta.
production. One method of treatment methods would therefore be
based on drugs that inhibit the formation of A.beta. in vivo.
[0012] Methods of treatment could target the formation of A.beta.
through the enzymes involved in the proteolytic processing of
.beta. amyloid precursor protein. Compounds that inhibit .beta. or
.gamma. secretase activity, either directly or indirectly, could
control the production of A.beta.. Advantageously, compounds that
specifically target .gamma. secretases, could control the
production of A.beta.. Such inhibition of .beta. or .gamma.
secretases could thereby reduce production of A.beta., which,
thereby, could reduce or prevent the neurological disorders
associated with A.beta. protein.
[0013] It is believed that several macromolecules, some of which
have proteolytic activity, are involved in the processing of
amyloid precursor protein (APP). This processing leads to several
products including the .beta.-amyloid peptides (A.beta.) believed
etiologically important in Alzheimers Disease. We have discovered
novel tagged compounds, functional in themselves as A.beta.
inhibitors, for use in identifying a site or sites on one or more
macromolecules critical to the processing of .beta. APP and the
production of A.beta.. We have discovered novel tagged compounds
which inhibit the proteolytic activity leading to production of
A.beta. by interacting with one or more macromolecules critical to
the processing of APP and the production of A.beta.. We have also
discovered a site of action of these tagged compounds using
radioisotope tagged derivatives of a compound of Formula (I).
[0014] Three examples of tagged compounds include (I-7T), (I-11T),
and (I-43T): 1
[0015] (I-7): R**=.sup.1H; Y.dbd.--O--;
[0016] (I-7T): R**=.sup.3H; Y.dbd.--O--; and
[0017] (I-11): R**=.sup.1H; Y.dbd.--C(.dbd.O)--;
[0018] (I-11T): R**=.sup.3H; Y.dbd.--C(.dbd.O)--; and 2
[0019] (I-43): R**=.sup.1H;
[0020] (I-43T): R**=.sup.3H.
[0021] The concentration of Compound (I-7) leading to half-maximal
inhibition (IC.sub.50) of proteolytic activity leading to A.beta.
production in HEK.sub.293 cells expressing APP 695 wt is similar to
the concentration leading to half-maximal inhibition (IC.sub.50) of
Compound (I-7T) binding to membranes derived from the same cell
line. The correlation holds for compounds (I-11T) and (I-43T). Also
using a compound of Formula (I), we have discovered a macromolecule
containing a binding site of action for compounds of Formula (I)
critical to the processing of APP and the production of
A.beta..
[0022] Furthermore, we have discovered through competitive binding
studies that there is a good correlation between the ability of a
series of compounds to inhibit the proteolytic activity leading to
production of A.beta. and to inhibit the binding of Compound
(I-7T), (I-11T), or (I-43T) to said membranes. Thus, the binding of
Compound (I-7T), (I-11T), or (I-43T) to relevant tissues and cell
lines, membranes derived from relevant tissues and cell lines, as
well as isolated macromolecules and complexes of isolated
macromolecules, is useful in the identification of inhibitors of
A.beta. production through competitive binding assays. Furthermore,
such competitive binding assays are useful in identification of
inhibitors of proteolytic activity leading to A.beta. production
for the treatment of Alzheimer's disease. Furthermore, such
competitive binding assays are useful in identification of
inhibitors of proteolytic activity leading to A.beta. production
for the treatment of neurological disorders and other disorders
involving A.beta., APP, and/or A.beta./APP associated
macromolecules, and other macromolecules associated with the site
of Compound (I-7T), (I-11T), or (I-43T) binding.
SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION
[0023] One object of the present invention is to provide a method
for diagnosing a neurological disease involving APP processing
and/or the production of beta-amyloid production within a mammalian
body comprising: a) administering a diagnostically effective amount
of a radiopharmaceutical inhibitor of APP processing and/or the
production of beta-amyloid production; and b) imaging the area of
the patient wherein the disease is located.
[0024] It is another object of the present invention to provide a
method for diagnosising a neurological disease involving APP
processing and/or the production of beta-amyloid production within
a mammalian body comprising: a) administering a diagnostically
effective amount of an ultrasound contrast agent composition
inhibitor of APP processing and/or the production of beta-amyloid
production; and b) imaging the area of the patient wherein the
disease is located.
[0025] It is another object of the present invention to provide
radiolabeled inhibitors of APP processing and/or the production of
beta-amyloid production for use in methods of in vivo diagnostic
imaging in the diagnosis of diseases involving APP processing
and/or the production of beta-amyloid production. Also provided in
the present invention are methods of in vivo diagnostic imaging
comprising administering to a subject a diagnostically effective
amount of a radiolabeled inhibitor of APP processing and/or the
production of beta-amyloid production.
[0026] These and other objects, which will become apparent during
the following detailed description, have been achieved by the
inventors' discovery that compounds of Formula (I): 3
[0027] (I-7): R**=.sup.1H; Y.dbd.--O--;
[0028] (I-7T): R**=.sup.3H; Y.dbd.--O--; and
[0029] (I-11): R**=.sup.1H; Y.dbd.--C(.dbd.O)--;
[0030] (I-11T): R**=.sup.3H; Y.dbd.--C(.dbd.O)--; and 4
[0031] (I-43): R**=.sup.1H;
[0032] (I-43T): R**=.sup.3H;
[0033] bind specifically to a binding site on a macromolecule or a
complex of macromolecules involved in APP processing to produce
reduction of A.beta. peptide production. For example, the
concentration of Compound (I-7) leading to half-maximal inhibition
(IC.sub.50) of A.beta. production in HEK.sub.293 cells expressing
APP 695 wt is similar to the concentration leading to half-maximal
inhibition (IC.sub.50) of Compound (I-7T) binding to membranes
derived from the same cell line.
[0034] FIG. 1 illustrates the correlation between results of the
Radioligand Competition Binding Assay and the cross-linking assay
of Example 103.
[0035] FIG. 2 illustrates a fluorography of a 12% SDS-PAGE after
immunoprecipitation of specifically cross-linked polypepetides by
presenilin-1 antibodies.
[0036] FIG. 3 illustrates isolation of cross-linked polypeptides by
presenilin 1 affinity chromatography.
[0037] FIG. 4 illustrates a fluorography of a 12% SDS-PAGE after
immunoprecipitation of specifically cross-linked polypepetides by
presenilin-2 antibodies.
DETAILED DESCRIPTION OF PREFERRED EMBODIMENTS
[0038] Thus, in a first embodiment, the present invention provides
a method of screening for inhibitors of beta-amyloid production
comprising,
[0039] 1) contacting a potential inhibitor of beta-amyloid
production and a tagged inhibitor of beta-amyloid production with
at least one macromolecule involved in the processing of APP and/or
the production of beta-amyloid peptide, said macromolecule
containing a binding site specific for said tagged inhibitor of
beta-amyloid production;
[0040] 2) separating the tagged inhibitor of beta-amyloid
production bound to said macromolecule from the tagged inhibitor of
beta-amyloid production free from said macromolecule; and
[0041] 3) determining an inhibitory concentration of the potential
inhibitor of beta-amyloid production from the concentration of
tagged inhibitor of beta-amyloid production bound to said
macromolecule.
[0042] The present invention provides the foregoing method wherein
the macromolecule is selected from:
[0043] (1) presenilin-1;
[0044] (2) presenilin-2;
[0045] (3) .beta. secretase;
[0046] (4) .alpha. secretase;
[0047] (5) .gamma. secretase; or
[0048] (6) BACE/memapsin 2.
[0049] In a more preferred embodiment the present invention
provides a method wherein the tagged inhibitor of beta-amyloid
production comprises a radiolabeled inhibitor of beta-amyloid
production, a fluorescence labeled inhibitor of beta-amyloid
production or a biotin labeled inhibitor of beta-amyloid
production.
[0050] In a more preferred embodiment the tagged inhibitor of
beta-amyloid production comprises a radiolabeled inhibitor of
beta-amyloid production.
[0051] In an even more preferred embodiment the present invention
provides a method wherein the tagged inhibitor of beta-amyloid
production comprises a tritium or iodine radiolabeled inhibitor of
beta-amyloid production.
[0052] In an even more preferred embodiment the present invention
provides a method wherein the tagged inhibitor of beta-amyloid
production comprises a tritium labeled inhibitor of beta-amyloid
production.
[0053] In an even more preferred embodiment the present invention,
provides a method wherein the tagged inhibitor of beta-amyloid
production comprises a compound of the Formula (I): 5
[0054] wherein:
[0055] at least one atom of the compound of the Formula (I) is
radiolabeled;
[0056] Q is --NR.sup.1R.sup.2;
[0057] R.sup.1, at each occurrence, is independently selected
from:
[0058] H;
[0059] C.sub.1-C.sub.6 alkyl substituted with 0-3 R.sup.1a;
[0060] C.sub.3-C.sub.10 carbocycle substituted with 0-3
R.sup.1b;
[0061] C.sub.6-C.sub.10 aryl substituted with 0-3 R.sup.1b; and
[0062] 5 to 10 membered heterocycle substituted with 0-3
R.sup.1b;
[0063] R.sup.1a, at each occurrence, is independently selected from
H, C.sub.1-C.sub.6 alkyl, OR.sup.14, Cl, F, Br, I, .dbd.O, CN,
NO.sub.2, NR.sup.15R.sup.16, phenyl, CF.sub.3;
[0064] C.sub.3-C.sub.10 carbocycle substituted with 0-3
R.sup.1b;
[0065] C.sub.6-C.sub.10 aryl substituted with 0-3 R.sup.1b; and
[0066] 5 to 10 membered heterocycle substituted with 0-3
R.sup.1b;
[0067] R.sup.1b, at each occurrence, is independently selected from
H, OH, C.sub.1-C.sub.6 alkyl, C.sub.1-C.sub.4 alkoxy, Cl, F, Br, I,
CN, NO.sub.2, NR.sup.15R.sup.16, or CF.sub.3;
[0068] R.sup.2 is independently selected from H, OH,
C.sub.1-C.sub.6 alkyl, C.sub.1-C.sub.6 alkoxy, C.sub.3-C.sub.10
carbocycle, C.sub.6-C.sub.10 aryl and 5 to 10 membered
heterocycle;
[0069] R.sup.3 is C.sub.1-C.sub.6 alkyl substituted with 0-1
R.sup.4;
[0070] R.sup.4 is H, OH, C.sub.1-C.sub.6 alkoxy, C.sub.1-C.sub.6
alkyl, C.sub.2-C.sub.6 alkenyl, C.sub.2-C.sub.6 alkynyl,
C.sub.3-C.sub.10 carbocycle, C.sub.6-C.sub.10 aryl, or 5 to 10
membered heterocycle;
[0071] R.sup.5 is H, OR.sup.14;
[0072] C.sub.1-C.sub.6 alkyl substituted with 0-3 R.sup.5b;
[0073] C.sub.1-C.sub.6 alkoxy substituted with 0-3 R.sup.5b;
[0074] C.sub.2-C.sub.6 alkenyl substituted with 0-3 R.sup.5b;
[0075] C.sub.2-C.sub.6 alkynyl substituted with 0-3 R.sup.5b;
[0076] C.sub.3-C.sub.10 carbocycle substituted with 0-3
R.sup.5c;
[0077] C.sub.6-C.sub.10 aryl substituted with 0-3 R.sup.5c; or
[0078] 5 to 10 membered heterocycle substituted with 0-3
R.sup.5c;
[0079] R.sup.5b, at each occurrence, is independently selected
from:
[0080] H, C.sub.1-C.sub.6 alkyl, CF.sub.3, OR.sup.14, Cl, F, Br, I,
.dbd.O, CN, NO.sub.2, NR.sup.15R.sup.16;
[0081] C.sub.3-C.sub.10 carbocycle substituted with 0-3
R.sup.5c;
[0082] C.sub.6-C.sub.10 aryl substituted with 0-3 R.sup.5c; or
[0083] 5 to 10 membered heterocycle substituted with 0-3
R.sup.5c;
[0084] R.sup.5c, at each occurrence, is independently selected from
H, OH, C.sub.1-C.sub.6 alkyl, C.sub.1-C.sub.4 alkoxy, Cl, F, Br, I,
CN, NO.sub.2, NR.sup.15R.sup.16, or CF.sub.3;
[0085] R.sup.6 is H;
[0086] C.sub.1-C.sub.6 alkyl substituted with 0-3 R.sup.6a;
[0087] C.sub.3-C.sub.10 carbocycle substituted with 0-3 R.sup.6b;
or
[0088] C.sub.6-C.sub.10 aryl substituted with 0-3 R.sup.6b;
[0089] R.sup.6a, at each occurrence, is independently selected from
H, C.sub.1-C.sub.6 alkyl, OR.sup.14, Cl, F, Br, I, .dbd.O, CN,
NO.sub.2, NR.sup.15R.sup.16, phenyl or CF.sub.3;
[0090] R.sup.6b, at each occurrence, is independently selected from
H, OH, C.sub.1-C.sub.6 alkyl, C.sub.1-C.sub.4 alkoxy, Cl, F, Br, I,
CN, NO.sub.2, NR.sup.15R.sup.16, or CF.sub.3;
[0091] W is --(CR.sup.8R.sup.8a).sub.p--;
[0092] p is 0 to 4;
[0093] R.sup.8 and R.sup.8a, at each occurrence, are independently
selected from H, C.sub.1-C.sub.4 alkyl, C.sub.2-C.sub.4 alkenyl,
C.sub.2-C.sub.4 alkynyl and C.sub.3-C.sub.8 cycloalkyl;
[0094] X is a bond;
[0095] C.sub.6-C.sub.10 aryl substituted with 0-3 R.sup.Xb;
[0096] C.sub.3-C.sub.10 carbocycle substituted with 0-3 R.sup.Xb;
or
[0097] 5 to 10 membered heterocycle substituted with 0-3
R.sup.Xb;
[0098] R.sup.Xb, at each occurrence, is independently selected from
H, OH, C.sub.1-C.sub.6 alkyl, C.sub.1-C.sub.4 alkoxy, Cl, F, Br, I,
CN, NO.sub.2, NR.sup.15R.sup.16, or CF.sub.3;
[0099] Y is a bond or
--(CR.sup.9R.sup.9a).sub.t--V--(CR.sup.9R.sup.9a).su- b.u--;
[0100] t is 0 to 3;
[0101] u is 0 to 3;
[0102] R.sup.9 and R.sup.9a, at each occurrence, are independently
selected from H, C.sub.1-C.sub.6 alkyl or C.sub.3-C.sub.8
cycloalkyl;
[0103] V is a bond, --C(.dbd.O)--, --O--, --S--, --S(.dbd.O)--,
--S(.dbd.O).sub.2--, --N(R.sup.19)--, --C(.dbd.O)NR.sup.19b--,
--NR.sup.19bC(.dbd.O)--, --NR.sup.19bS(.dbd.O).sub.2--,
--S(.dbd.O).sub.2NR.sup.19b--, NR.sup.19bS(.dbd.O)--,
--S(.dbd.O)NR.sup.19b--, --C(.dbd.O)O--, or --OC(.dbd.O)--;
[0104] Z is H;
[0105] C.sub.1-C.sub.8 alkyl substituted with 0-2 R.sup.12;
[0106] C.sub.2-C.sub.4 alkenyl substituted with 0-2 R.sup.12;
[0107] C.sub.2-C.sub.4 alkynyl substituted with 0-2 R.sup.12;
[0108] C.sub.6-C.sub.10 aryl substituted with 0-4 R.sup.12b;
[0109] C.sub.3-C.sub.10 carbocycle substituted with 0-4 R.sup.12b;
or
[0110] 5 to 10 membered heterocycle substituted with 0-3
R.sup.12b;
[0111] R.sup.12 is C.sub.6-C.sub.10 aryl substituted with 0-4
R.sup.12b;
[0112] C.sub.3-C.sub.10 carbocycle substituted with 0-4 R.sup.12b;
or
[0113] 5 to 10 membered heterocycle substituted with 0-3
R.sup.12b;
[0114] R.sup.12b, at each occurrence, is independently selected
from H, OH, C.sub.1-C.sub.6 alkyl, C.sub.1-C.sub.4 alkoxy, Cl, F,
Br, I, CN, NO.sub.2, NR.sup.15R.sup.16, or CF.sub.3;
[0115] B is a 5 to 10 membered lactam, wherein the lactam is
saturated, partially saturated or unsaturated; wherein each
additional lactam carbon is substituted with 0-2 R.sup.11; and,
optionally, the lactam contains a heteroatom selected from --O--,
--S--, --S(.dbd.O)--, --S(.dbd.O).sub.2--, --N.dbd. and
--N(R.sup.10)--;
[0116] R.sup.10 is H, C(.dbd.O)R.sup.17, C(.dbd.O)OR.sup.17,
C(.dbd.O)NR.sup.18R.sup.19, S(.dbd.O).sub.2NR.sup.18R.sup.19,
S(.dbd.O).sub.2R.sup.17;
[0117] C.sub.1-C.sub.6 alkyl optionally substituted with
R.sup.10a;
[0118] C.sub.6-C.sub.10 aryl substituted with 0-4 R.sup.10b;
[0119] C.sub.3-C.sub.10 carbocycle substituted with 0-3 R.sup.10b;
or
[0120] 5 to 10 membered heterocycle optionally substituted with 0-3
R.sup.10b;
[0121] R.sup.10a at each occurrence, is independently selected from
H, C.sub.1-C.sub.6 alkyl, C.sub.3-C.sub.6 cycloalkyl, OR.sup.14,
Cl, F, Br, I, .dbd.O, CN, NO.sub.2, NR.sup.15R.sup.16, phenyl or
CF.sub.3;
[0122] R.sup.10b, at each occurrence, is independently selected
from H, OH, C.sub.1-C.sub.6 alkyl, C.sub.1-C.sub.4 alkoxy, Cl, F,
Br, I, CN, NO.sub.2, NR.sup.15R.sup.16, or CF.sub.3;
[0123] R.sup.11 is C.sub.1-C.sub.4 alkoxy, Cl, F, Br, I, .dbd.O,
CN, NO.sub.2, NR.sup.18R.sup.19, C(.dbd.O)R.sup.17,
C(.dbd.O)OR.sup.17, C(.dbd.O)NR.sup.18R.sup.19,
S(.dbd.O).sub.2NR.sup.18R.sup.19, CF.sub.3;
[0124] C.sub.1-C.sub.6 alkyl optionally substituted with
R.sup.11a;
[0125] C.sub.6-C.sub.10 aryl substituted with 0-3 R.sup.11b;
[0126] C.sub.3-C.sub.10 carbocycle substituted with 0-3 R.sup.11b;
or
[0127] 5 to 10 membered heterocycle substituted with 0-3
R.sup.11b;
[0128] alternatively, two R.sup.11 substituents on the same carbon
atoms may be combined to form a C.sub.3-C.sub.6 carbocycle;
[0129] alternatively, two R.sup.11 substituents on adjacent carbon
atoms may be combined to form a C.sub.3-C.sub.6 carbocycle or a
benzo fused radical, wherein said benzo fused radical is
substituted with 0-3 R.sup.13;
[0130] R.sup.11a, at each occurrence, is independently selected
from H, C.sub.1-C.sub.6 alkyl, OR.sup.14, Cl, F, Br, I, .dbd.O, CN,
NO.sub.2, NR.sup.15R.sup.16, phenyl or CF.sub.3;
[0131] R.sup.11b, at each occurrence, is independently selected
from H, OH, C.sub.1-C.sub.6 alkyl, C.sub.1-C.sub.4 alkoxy, Cl, F,
Br, I, CN, NO.sub.2, NR.sup.15R.sup.16, or CF.sub.3;
[0132] R.sup.13, at each occurrence, is independently selected from
H, OH, C.sub.1-C.sub.6 alkyl, C.sub.1-C.sub.4 alkoxy, Cl, F, Br, I,
CN, NO.sub.2, NR.sup.15R.sup.16, or CF.sub.3;
[0133] R.sup.14 is H, phenyl, benzyl, C.sub.1-C.sub.6 alkyl, or
C.sub.2-C.sub.6 alkoxyalkyl;
[0134] R.sup.15, at each occurrence, is independently selected from
H, C.sub.1-C.sub.6 alkyl, benzyl, phenethyl,
--C(.dbd.O)--(C.sub.1-C.sub.6 alkyl) and
--S(.dbd.O).sub.2--(C.sub.1-C.sub.6 alkyl);
[0135] R.sup.16, at each occurrence, is independently selected from
H, OH, C.sub.1-C.sub.6 alkyl, benzyl, phenethyl,
--C(.dbd.O)--(C.sub.1-C.sub.6 alkyl) and
--S(.dbd.O).sub.2--(C.sub.1-C.sub.6 alkyl);
[0136] R.sup.17 is H, phenyl, benzyl, C.sub.1-C.sub.6 alkyl, or
C.sub.2-C.sub.6 alkoxyalkyl;
[0137] R.sup.18, at each occurrence, is independently selected from
H, C.sub.1-C.sub.6 alkyl, benzyl, phenethyl,
--C(.dbd.O)--(C.sub.1-C.sub.6 alkyl) and
--S(.dbd.O).sub.2--(C.sub.1-C.sub.6 alkyl); and
[0138] R.sup.19, at each occurrence, is independently selected from
H, OH, C.sub.1-C.sub.6 alkyl, phenyl, benzyl, phenethyl,
--C(.dbd.O)--(C.sub.1-C- .sub.6 alkyl) and
--S(.dbd.O).sub.2--(C.sub.1-C.sub.6 alkyl);
[0139] R.sup.19b is H, C.sub.1-C.sub.6 alkyl, C.sub.3-C.sub.8
cycloalkyl, phenyl, benzyl or phenethyl; and
[0140] R.sup.20 is H or C.sub.1-C.sub.6 alkyl.
[0141] In an even further more preferred embodiment the present
invention, provides a method wherein Q of a compound of Formula (I)
is --NH.sub.2.
[0142] In an even further more preferred embodiment the present
invention, provides a method wherein R.sup.3 of a compound of
Formula (I) is C.sub.3-C.sub.6 alkyl.
[0143] In an even further more preferred embodiment the present
invention, provides a method wherein R.sup.3 of a compound of
Formula (I) is C.sub.3-C.sub.6 alkyl substituted with about 1 to
about 4 .sup.3H;
[0144] In an even further more preferred embodiment the present
invention, provides a method wherein Q is --NH.sub.2, and R.sup.3
is C.sub.3-C.sub.6 alkyl substituted with about 1 to about 4
.sup.3H.
[0145] In an even further more preferred embodiment the present
invention, provides a method wherein the tagged inhibitor of
beta-amyloid production comprises a compound of the Formula (II):
6
[0146] wherein:
[0147] at least one atom of the compound of the Formula (II) is
radiolabeled.
[0148] In an even further more preferred embodiment the present
invention, provides a method wherein R.sup.3, in a compound of
Formula (II), is C.sub.3-C.sub.6 alkyl substituted with about 1 to
about 4 .sup.3H.
[0149] In a most preferred embodiment the present invention,
provides a method wherein the tagged inhibitor of beta-amyloid
production comprises a compound of Formula: 7 8
[0150] wherein m is about 2.
[0151] In a further most preferred embodiment the present
invention, provides a method wherein the tagged inhibitor of
beta-amyloid production comprises a compound of Formula (I-43T)
9
[0152] wherein m is about 2.
[0153] In yet another preferred embodiment the present invention
provides a method wherein the tagged inhibitor of beta-amyloid
production comprises a compound selected from U.S. Pat. No.
5,703,129; PCT application WO98/28268; PCT application WO98/22441;
PCT application WO98/22433; PCT application WO98/22430; PCT
application WO98/22493; PCT application WO98/22494; PCT application
WO98/38177; or PCT application WO95/09838; wherein the compound has
been tagged for purposes of the invention.
[0154] In another preferred embodiment the present invention
provides a method wherein at least one macromolecule involved in
the processing of APP and the production of beta-amyloid peptide
comprises presenilin 1 or a fragment of presenilin 1.
[0155] In another preferred embodiment the present invention
provides a method wherein the macromolecule involved in the
processing of APP and/or the production of beta-amyloid peptide
comprises:
[0156] (1) presenilin-1;
[0157] (2) presenilin-2;
[0158] (3) .beta. secretase;
[0159] (4) .alpha. secretase;
[0160] (5) .gamma. secretase; or
[0161] (6) BACE/memapsin 2;
[0162] or any fragment or derivative thereof.
[0163] In another preferred embodiment the present invention
provides a method wherein at least one macromolecule involved in
the processing of APP and the production of beta-amyloid peptide
comprises either 1) presenilin 1 or a fragment of presenilin 1 or
2) presenilin 2 or a fragment of presenilin 2; but not both.
[0164] In yet another preferred embodiment the present invention
provides a method wherein the inhibitory concentration is half
maximal inhibitory concentration.
[0165] In a second embodiment, the present invention provides a
pharmaceutical composition comprising a pharmaceutically acceptable
carrier and a therapeutically effective amount of an inhibitor of
beta-amyloid production identified by the screening assay of claim
1 or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt or prodrug form
thereof.
[0166] In a third embodiment, the present invention provides a
method for treating degenerative neurological disorders involving
beta-amyloid production comprising administering to a host in need
of such treatment a therapeutically effective amount of an
inhibitor of beta-amyloid production identified by the screening
assay of claim 1 or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt or prodrug
form thereof.
[0167] In a preferred third embodiment the degenerative
neurological disorder is Alzheimer's Disease.
[0168] In a fourth embodiment, the present invention provides a
method of identifying a macromolecule involved in APP processing
comprising
[0169] 1) contacting a tagged inhibitor of beta-amyloid production
with material suspected to contain a macromolecule involved in APP
processing;
[0170] 2) separating a complex comprising a tagged inhibitor of
beta-amyloid production and a macromolecule involved in APP
processing; and
[0171] 3) identifying the complex.
[0172] In a preferred fourth embodiment the present invention
provides a method wherein the tagged inhibitor of beta-amyloid
production comprises a radiolabeled inhibitor of beta-amyloid
production, a fluorescence labeled inhibitor of beta-amyloid
production, a biotin labeled inhibitor of beta-amyloid production,
a photoaffinity labeled inhibitor of beta-amyloid production, or
any combination of tags thereof in one inhibitor of beta-amyloid
production.
[0173] In a preferred fourth embodiment the present invention
provides a method wherein the tagged inhibitor of beta-amyloid
production comprises a radiolabeled inhibitor of beta-amyloid
production.
[0174] In a more preferred fourth embodiment the present invention
provides a method wherein the tagged inhibitor of beta-amyloid
production comprises a tritium labeled inhibitor of beta-amyloid
production.
[0175] In a more preferred fourth embodiment the present invention
provides a method wherein the tagged inhibitor of beta-amyloid
production comprises a compound of Formula (I): 10
[0176] wherein:
[0177] at least one atom of the compound of the Formula (I) is
radiolabeled;
[0178] Q is --NR.sup.1R.sup.2;
[0179] R.sup.1, at each occurrence, is independently selected
from:
[0180] H;
[0181] C.sub.1-C.sub.6 alkyl substituted with 0-3 R.sup.1a;
[0182] C.sub.3-C.sub.10 carbocycle substituted with 0-3
R.sup.1b;
[0183] C.sub.6-C.sub.10 aryl substituted with 0-3 R.sup.1b; and
[0184] 5 to 10 membered heterocycle substituted with 0-3
R.sup.1b;
[0185] R.sup.1a, at each occurrence, is independently selected from
H, C.sub.1-C.sub.6 alkyl, OR.sup.14, Cl, F, Br, I, .dbd.O, CN,
NO.sub.2, NR.sup.15R.sup.16, phenyl, CF.sub.3;
[0186] C.sub.3-C.sub.10 carbocycle substituted with 0-3
R.sup.1b;
[0187] C.sub.6-C.sub.10 aryl substituted with 0-3 R.sup.1b; and
[0188] 5 to 10 membered heterocycle substituted with 0-3
R.sup.1b;
[0189] R.sup.1b, at each occurrence, is independently selected from
H, OH, C.sub.1-C.sub.6 alkyl, C.sub.1-C.sub.4 alkoxy, Cl, F, Br, I,
CN, NO.sub.2, NR.sup.15R.sup.16, or CF.sub.3;
[0190] R.sup.2 is independently selected from H, OH,
C.sub.1-C.sub.6 alkyl, C.sub.1-C.sub.6 alkoxy, C.sub.3-C.sub.10
carbocycle, C.sub.6-C.sub.10 aryl and 5 to 10 membered
heterocycle;
[0191] R.sup.3 is C.sub.1-C.sub.6 alkyl substituted with 0-1
R.sup.4;
[0192] R.sup.4 is H, OH, C.sub.1-C.sub.6 alkoxy, C.sub.1-C.sub.6
alkyl, C.sub.2-C.sub.6 alkenyl, C.sub.2-C.sub.6 alkynyl,
C.sub.3-C.sub.10 carbocycle, C.sub.6-C.sub.10 aryl, or 5 to 10
membered heterocycle;
[0193] R.sup.5 is H, OR.sup.14;
[0194] C.sub.1-C.sub.6 alkyl substituted with 0-3 R.sup.5b;
[0195] C.sub.1-C.sub.6 alkoxy substituted with 0-3 R.sup.5b;
[0196] C.sub.2-C.sub.6 alkenyl substituted with 0-3 R.sup.5b;
[0197] C.sub.2-C.sub.6 alkynyl substituted with 0-3 R.sup.5b;
[0198] C.sub.3-C.sub.10 carbocycle substituted with 0-3
R.sup.5c;
[0199] C.sub.6-C.sub.10 aryl substituted with 0-3 R.sup.5c; or
[0200] 5 to 10 membered heterocycle substituted with 0-3
R.sup.5c;
[0201] R.sup.5b, at each occurrence, is independently selected
from:
[0202] H, C.sub.1-C.sub.6 alkyl, CF.sub.3, OR.sup.14, Cl, F, Br, I,
.dbd.O, CN, NO.sub.2, NR.sup.15R.sup.16;
[0203] C.sub.3-C.sub.10 carbocycle substituted with 0-3
R.sup.5c;
[0204] C.sub.6-C.sub.10 aryl substituted with 0-3 R.sup.5c; or
[0205] 5 to 10 membered heterocycle substituted with 0-3
R.sup.5c;
[0206] R.sup.5c, at each occurrence, is independently selected from
H, OH, C.sub.1-C.sub.6 alkyl, C.sub.1-C.sub.4 alkoxy, Cl, F, Br, I,
CN, NO.sub.2, NR.sup.15R.sup.16, or CF.sub.3;
[0207] R.sup.6 is H;
[0208] C.sub.1-C.sub.6 alkyl substituted with 0-3 R.sup.6a;
[0209] C.sub.3-C.sub.10 carbocycle substituted with 0-3 R.sup.6b;
or
[0210] C.sub.6-C.sub.10 aryl substituted with 0-3 R.sup.6b;
[0211] R.sup.6a, at each occurrence, is independently selected from
H, C.sub.1-C.sub.6 alkyl, OR.sup.14, Cl, F, Br, I, .dbd.O, CN,
NO.sub.2, NR.sup.15R.sup.16, phenyl or CF.sub.3;
[0212] R.sup.6b, at each occurrence, is independently selected from
H, OH, C.sub.1-C.sub.6 alkyl, C.sub.1-C.sub.4 alkoxy, Cl, F, Br, I,
CN, NO.sub.2, NR.sup.15R.sup.16, or CF.sub.3;
[0213] W is --(CR.sup.8R.sup.8a).sub.p--;
[0214] p is 0 to 4;
[0215] R.sup.8 and R.sup.8a, at each occurrence, are independently
selected from H, C.sub.1-C.sub.4 alkyl, C.sub.2-C.sub.4 alkenyl,
C.sub.2-C.sub.4 alkynyl and C.sub.3-C.sub.8 cycloalkyl;
[0216] X is a bond;
[0217] C.sub.6-C.sub.10 aryl substituted with 0-3 R.sup.Xb;
[0218] C.sub.3-C.sub.10 carbocycle substituted with 0-3 R.sup.Xb;
or
[0219] 5 to 10 membered heterocycle substituted with 0-3
R.sup.Xb;
[0220] R.sup.Xb, at each occurrence, is independently selected from
H, OH, C.sub.1-C.sub.6 alkyl, C.sub.1-C.sub.4 alkoxy, Cl, F, Br, I,
CN, NO.sub.2, NR.sup.15R.sup.16, or CF.sub.3;
[0221] Y is a bond or --(CR.sup.9R.sup.9a)
.sub.t--V--(CR.sup.9R.sup.9a) .sub.u--;
[0222] t is 0 to 3;
[0223] u is 0 to 3;
[0224] R.sup.9 and R.sup.9a, at each occurrence, are independently
selected from H, C.sub.1-C.sub.6 alkyl or C.sub.3-C.sub.8
cycloalkyl;
[0225] V is a bond, --C(.dbd.O)--, --O--, --S--, --S(.dbd.O)--,
--S(.dbd.O).sub.2--, --N(R.sup.19)--, C(.dbd.O)NR.sup.19b--,
--NR.sup.19bC(.dbd.O)--, --NR.sup.19bS(.dbd.O).sub.2--,
--S(.dbd.O).sub.2NR.sup.19b--, --NR.sup.19bS(.dbd.O)--,
--S(.dbd.O)NR.sup.19b--, --C(.dbd.O)O--, or --OC(.dbd.O)--;
[0226] Z is H;
[0227] C.sub.1-C.sub.8 alkyl substituted with 0-2 R.sup.12;
[0228] C.sub.2-C.sub.4 alkenyl substituted with 0-2 R.sup.12;
[0229] C.sub.2-C.sub.4 alkynyl substituted with 0-2 R.sup.12;
[0230] C.sub.6-C.sub.10 aryl substituted with 0-4 R.sup.12b;
[0231] C.sub.3-C.sub.10 carbocycle substituted with 0-4 R.sup.12b;
or
[0232] 5 to 10 membered heterocycle substituted with 0-3
R.sup.12b;
[0233] R.sup.12 is C.sub.6-C.sub.10 aryl substituted with 0-4
R.sup.12b;
[0234] C.sub.3-C.sub.10 carbocycle substituted with 0-4 R.sup.12b;
or
[0235] 5 to 10 membered heterocycle substituted with 0-3
R.sup.12b;
[0236] R.sup.12b, at each occurrence, is independently selected
from H, OH, C.sub.1-C.sub.6 alkyl, C.sub.1-C.sub.4 alkoxy, Cl, F,
Br, I, CN, NO.sub.2, NR.sup.15R.sup.16, or CF.sub.3;
[0237] B is a 5 to 10 membered lactam, wherein the lactam is
saturated, partially saturated or unsaturated; wherein each
additional lactam carbon is substituted with 0-2 R.sup.11; and,
optionally, the lactam contains a heteroatom selected from --O--,
--S--, --S(.dbd.O)--, --S(.dbd.O).sub.2--, --N.dbd., and
--N(R.sup.10)--;
[0238] R.sup.10 is H, C(.dbd.O)R.sup.17, C(.dbd.O)OR.sup.17,
C(.dbd.O)NR.sup.18R.sup.19, S(.dbd.O).sub.2NR.sup.18R.sup.19,
S(.dbd.O).sub.2R.sup.17;
[0239] C.sub.1-C.sub.6 alkyl optionally substituted with
R.sup.10a;
[0240] C.sub.6-C.sub.10 aryl substituted with 0-4 R.sup.10b;
[0241] C.sub.3-C.sub.10 carbocycle substituted with 0-3 R.sup.10b;
or
[0242] 5 to 10 membered heterocycle optionally substituted with 0-3
R.sup.10b;
[0243] R.sup.10a, at each occurrence, is independently selected
from H, C.sub.1-C.sub.6 alkyl, C.sub.3-C.sub.6 cycloalkyl,
OR.sup.14, Cl, F, Br, I, .dbd.O, CN, NO.sub.2, NR.sup.15R.sup.16,
phenyl or CF.sub.3;
[0244] R.sup.10b, at each occurrence, is independently selected
from H, OH, C.sub.1-C.sub.6 alkyl, C.sub.1-C.sub.4 alkoxy, Cl, F,
Br, I, CN, NO.sub.2, NR.sup.15R.sup.16, or CF.sub.3;
[0245] R.sup.11 is C.sub.1-C.sub.4 alkoxy, Cl, F, Br, I, .dbd.O,
CN, NO.sub.2, NR.sup.18R.sup.19, C(.dbd.O)R.sup.17,
C(.dbd.O)OR.sup.17, C(.dbd.O)NR.sup.18R.sup.19,
S(.dbd.O).sub.2NR.sup.18R.sup.19, CF.sub.3;
[0246] C.sub.1-C.sub.6 alkyl optionally substituted with
R.sup.11a;
[0247] C.sub.6-C.sub.10 aryl substituted with 0-3 R.sup.11b;
[0248] C.sub.3-C.sub.10 carbocycle substituted with 0-3 R.sup.11b;
or
[0249] 5 to 10 membered heterocycle substituted with 0-3
R.sup.11b;
[0250] alternatively, two R.sup.11 substituents on the same carbon
atoms may be combined to form a C.sub.3-C.sub.6 carbocycle;
[0251] alternatively, two R.sup.11 substituents on adjacent carbon
atoms may be combined to form a C.sub.3-C.sub.6 carbocycle or a
benzo fused radical, wherein said benzo fused radical is
substituted with 0-3 R.sup.13;
[0252] R.sup.11a, at each occurrence, is independently selected
from H, C.sub.1-C.sub.6 alkyl, OR.sup.14, Cl, F, Br, I, .dbd.O, CN,
NO.sub.2, NR.sup.15R.sup.16, phenyl or CF.sub.3;
[0253] R.sup.11b, at each occurrence, is independently selected
from H, OH, C.sub.1-C.sub.6 alkyl, C.sub.1-C.sub.4 alkoxy, Cl, F,
Br, I, CN, NO.sub.2, NR.sup.15R.sup.16, or CF.sub.3;
[0254] R.sup.13, at each occurrence, is independently selected from
H, OH, C.sub.1-C.sub.6 alkyl, C.sub.1-C.sub.4 alkoxy, Cl, F, Br, I,
CN, NO.sub.2, NR.sup.15R.sup.16, or CF.sub.3;
[0255] R.sup.14 is H, phenyl, benzyl, C.sub.1-C.sub.6 alkyl, or
C.sub.2-C.sub.6 alkoxyalkyl;
[0256] R.sup.15, at each occurrence, is independently selected from
H, C.sub.1-C.sub.6 alkyl, benzyl, phenethyl,
--C(.dbd.O)--(C.sub.1-C.sub.6 alkyl) and
--S(.dbd.O).sub.2--(C.sub.1-C.sub.6 alkyl);
[0257] R.sup.16, at each occurrence, is independently selected from
H, OH, C.sub.1-C.sub.6 alkyl, benzyl, phenethyl,
--C(.dbd.O)--(C.sub.1-C.sub.6 alkyl) and
--S(.dbd.O).sub.2--(C.sub.1-C.sub.6 alkyl);
[0258] R.sup.17 is H, phenyl, benzyl, C.sub.1-C.sub.6 alkyl, or
C.sub.2-C.sub.6 alkoxyalkyl;
[0259] R.sup.18, at each occurrence, is independently selected from
H, C.sub.1-C.sub.6 alkyl, benzyl, phenethyl,
--C(.dbd.O)--(C.sub.1-C.sub.6 alkyl) and
--S(.dbd.O).sub.2--(C.sub.1-C.sub.6 alkyl); and
[0260] R.sup.19, at each occurrence, is independently selected from
H, OH, C.sub.1-C.sub.6 alkyl, phenyl, benzyl, phenethyl,
--C(.dbd.O)-(C.sub.1-C.- sub.6 alkyl) and --S(.dbd.O).sub.2--
(C.sub.1-C.sub.6 alkyl);
[0261] R.sup.19b is H, C.sub.1-C.sub.6 alkyl, C.sub.3-C.sub.8
cycloalkyl, phenyl, benzyl or phenethyl; and
[0262] R.sup.20 is H or C.sub.1-C.sub.6 alkyl.
[0263] In an even more preferred fourth embodiment the present
invention provides a method wherein the tagged inhibitor of
beta-amyloid production comprises a compound of the Formula (I-7T):
11
[0264] wherein m is about 2.
[0265] In another preferred fourth embodiment the present invention
provides a method wherein the tagged inhibitor of beta-amyloid
production is radiolabeled and photoaffinity labeled.
[0266] In a more preferred fourth embodiment the present invention
provides a method wherein the tagged inhibitor of beta-amyloid
production comprises a compound of the Formula (I-11T): 12
[0267] wherein m is about 2.
[0268] In an even further more preferred fourth embodiment the
present invention provides a method wherein the tagged inhibitor of
beta-amyloid production comprises a compound of the Formula
(I-43T): 13
[0269] wherein m is about 2.
[0270] In fifth embodiment the present invention provides a
macromolecule involved in APP processing which a tagged inhibitor
of beta-amyloid production binds to specifically.
[0271] In a preferred fifth embodiment the present invention
provides a macromolecule wherein the the tagged inhibitor of
beta-amyloid production comprises a radiolabeled inhibitor of
beta-amyloid production, a fluorescence labeled inhibitor of
beta-amyloid production, a biotin labeled inhibitor of beta-amyloid
production, a photoaffinity labeled inhibitor of beta-amyloid
production, or any combination of tags thereof in one inhibitor of
beta-amyloid production.
[0272] In a preferred fifth embodiment the present invention
provides a macromolecule wherein the tagged inhibitor of
beta-amyloid production comprises a radiolabeled inhibitor of
beta-amyloid production.
[0273] In a more preferred fifth embodiment the present invention
provides a macromolecule wherein the tagged inhibitor of
beta-amyloid production comprises a compound of the Formula (I-7T):
14
[0274] wherein m is about 2.
[0275] In another preferred fifth embodiment the present invention
provides a macromolecule wherein the tagged inhibitor of
beta-amyloid production comprises a compound of the Formula
(I-11T): 15
[0276] wherein m is about 2.
[0277] In another preferred fifth embodiment the present invention
provides a macromolecule wherein the tagged inhibitor of
beta-amyloid production comprises a compound of the Formula
(I-43T): 16
[0278] wherein m is about 2.
[0279] In another preferred fifth embodiment the present invention
provides a macromolecule involved in APP processing which
macromolecule is presenilin 1 or a fragment of presenilin 1.
[0280] In another preferred fifth embodiment the present invention
provides a macromolecule involved in APP processing which
macromolecule is presenilin 2 or a fragment of presenilin 2.
[0281] In a sixth embodiment the present invention provides an
inhibitor of beta-amyloid production comprising a compound which
interacts with a binding site on a macromolecule involved in the
production of beta-amyloid peptide; wherein said binding site is
identified by a compound of Formula (I-7T) or (I-43T): 17
[0282] wherein m is about 2.
[0283] In the sixth embodiment the binding site is identified as a
specific binding site for a compound of Formula (I-7T) or (I-43T),
wherein m is about 2.
[0284] In a preferred sixth embodiment the macromolecule involved
in the production of beta-amyloid peptide is presenilin 1 or a
fragment of presenilin 1.
[0285] In a preferred sixth embodiment the macromolecule involved
in the production of beta-amyloid peptide is presenilin 2 or a
fragment of presenilin 2.
[0286] In another preferred sixth embodiment the invention provides
an inhibitor of beta-amyloid production comprising a compound which
interacts with a binding site on a macromolecule involved in the
production of beta-amyloid peptide; wherein said binding site is a
specific binding site for a compound of Formula (I-7T), wherein m
is about 2; and the compound demonstrates a half maximal inhibitory
concentration less than 10 micromolar for beta-amyloid
production.
[0287] In a more preferred sixth embodiment the invention provides
an inhibitor of beta-amyloid production comprising a compound which
interacts with a binding site on presenilin 1 or a fragment of
presenilin 1; wherein said binding site is a specific binding site
for a compound of Formula (I-7T), wherein m is about 2; and the
compound demonstrates a half maximal inhibitory concentration less
than 10 micromolar for beta-amyloid production.
[0288] In another preferred sixth embodiment the invention provides
an inhibitor of beta-amyloid production comprising a compound which
interacts with a binding site on a macromolecule involved in the
production of beta-amyloid peptide; wherein said binding site is a
specific binding site for a compound of Formula (I-43T), wherein m
is about 2; and the compound demonstrates a half maximal inhibitory
concentration less than 10 micromolar for beta-amyloid
production.
[0289] In another more preferred sixth embodiment the invention
provides an inhibitor of beta-amyloid production comprising a
compound which interacts with a binding site on presenilin 1 or a
fragment of presenilin 1; wherein said binding site is a specific
binding site for a compound of Formula (I-43T), wherein m is about
2; and the compound demonstrates a half maximal inhibitory
concentration less than 10 micromolar for beta-amyloid
production.
[0290] In a seventh embodiment the present invention provides a
tagged inhibitor of beta-amyloid production comprising a tagged
compound which interacts with a binding site on a macromolecule
involved in the production of beta-amyloid peptide; wherein said
binding site is identified by a compound of Formula (I-7T): 18
[0291] wherein m is about 2;
[0292] In the seventh embodiment the binding site is identified as
a specific binding site for a compound of Formula (I-7T) or
(I-43T), wherein m is about 2.
[0293] In a preferred seventh embodiment the macromolecule involved
in the production of beta-amyloid peptide is presenilin 1 or a
fragment of presenilin 1.
[0294] In a preferred seventh embodiment the macromolecule involved
in the production of beta-amyloid peptide is presenilin 2 or a
fragment of presenilin 2.
[0295] In another preferred seventh embodiment the invention
provides a tagged inhibitor of beta-amyloid production comprising a
tagged compound which interacts with a binding site on a
macromolecule involved in the production of beta-amyloid peptide;
wherein said binding site is a specific binding site for a compound
of Formula (I-7T), wherein m is about 2; and the tagged compound
demonstrates a half maximal inhibitory concentration less than 10
micromolar for beta-amyloid production.
[0296] In a more preferred seventh embodiment the invention
provides a tagged inhibitor of beta-amyloid production comprising a
tagged compound which interacts with a binding site on presenilin 1
or a fragment of presenilin 1; wherein said binding site is a
specific binding site for a compound of Formula (I-7T), wherein m
is about 2; and the tagged compound demonstrates a half maximal
inhibitory concentration less than 10 micromolar for beta-amyloid
production.
[0297] In another preferred seventh embodiment the invention
provides a tagged inhibitor of beta-amyloid production comprising a
tagged compound which interacts with a binding site on a
macromolecule involved in the production of beta-amyloid peptide;
wherein said binding site is a specific binding site for a compound
of Formula (I-43T), wherein m is about 2; and the tagged compound
demonstrates a half maximal inhibitory concentration less than 10
micromolar for beta-amyloid production.
[0298] In another more preferred seventh embodiment the invention
provides a tagged inhibitor of beta-amyloid production comprising a
tagged compound which interacts with a binding site on presenilin 1
or a fragment of presenilin 1; wherein said binding site is a
specific binding site for a compound of Formula (I-43T), wherein m
is about 2; and the tagged compound demonstrates a half maximal
inhibitory concentration less than 10 micromolar for beta-amyloid
production.
[0299] In yet another preferred embodiment the present invention
provides a tagged inhibitor of beta-amyloid production comprising a
compound claimed in or within the scope of compounds claimed in a
reference selected from Table 1:
1 TABLE 1 U.S. Pat. No. 5,703,129; PCT application WO98/28268; PCT
application WO98/22441; PCT application WO98/22433; PCT application
WO98/22430; PCT application WO98/22493; PCT application WO98/22494;
PCT application WO98/38177; and PCT application WO95/09838;
[0300] wherein the compound has been tagged for purposes of the
invention.
[0301] In an eighth embodiment the present invention provides a use
of a macromolecule or complex of macromolecules involved in APP
processing, which a tagged inhibitor of beta-amyloid production
binds to specifically, for the identification or assaying of
inhibitors as therapeutics for neurological and other disorders
involved in APP processing and beta-amyloid production.
[0302] In a preferred eighth embodiment the present invention
provides a use of a macromolecule or complex of macromolecules
involved in APP processing, which macromolecule or complex of
macromolecules is presenilin 1 or a fragment of presenilin 1.
[0303] In a more preferred eighth embodiment the present invention
provides a method of identifying inhibitors as therapeutics for
neurological and other disorders involved in APP processing and
beta-amyloid production comprising
[0304] (1) contacting at least one macromolecule involved in APP
processing and beta-amyloid production, which macromolecule a
tagged inhibitor of beta-amyloid production binds to specifically,
with a potential inhibitor of beta-amyloid production; and
[0305] (2) determining the level of inhibition of APP processing
and beta-amyloid production.
[0306] In an even more preferred eighth embodiment the present
invention provides a method wherein the macromolecule is a complex
of macromolecules.
[0307] In an even more preferred eighth embodiment the present
invention provides a method of wherein the macromolecule is
presenilin 1 or a fragment of presenilin 1.
[0308] In an even more preferred eighth embodiment the present
invention provides a method of wherein the macromolecule is
presenilin 2 or a fragment of presenilin 2.
[0309] In a ninth embodiment the present invention provides a
method of treating Alzheimer's disease comprising administering to
a host in need of such treatment a therapeutically effective amount
of an inhibitor of beta-amyloid production, or a pharmaceutically
acceptable salt or prodrug form thereof, wherein said inhibitor of
beta-amyloid production binds to a binding site on a macromolecule
involved in the production of beta-amyloid peptide and effects a
decrease in production of beta-amyloid peptide;
[0310] wherein said binding site is a specific binding site for a
compound of Formula (I-7T) or (I-43T) wherein m is about 2.
[0311] In a preferred ninth embodiment the macromolecule comprises
presenilin-1, a fragment of presenilin-1, presenilin-2, or a
fragment of presenilin-2.
[0312] In another preferred ninth embodiment the binding site is a
specific binding site for a compound of Formula (I-43T) wherein m
is about 2.
[0313] In a more preferred ninth embodiment the macromolecule
comprises presenilin-1 or a fragment of presenilin-1.
[0314] In another more preferred ninth embodiment the macromolecule
comprises presenilin-2 or a fragment of presenilin-2.
[0315] The present invention also provides radiolabeled inhibitors
of APP processing and/or the production of beta-amyloid production
for use in methods of in vivo diagnostic imaging in the diagnosis
of diseases involving APP processing and/or the production of
beta-amyloid production. Also provided in the present invention are
methods of in vivo diagnostic imaging comprising administering to a
subject a diagnostically effective amount of a radiolabeled
inhibitor of APP processing and/or the production of beta-amyloid
production. As used herein, the term "radiolabeled inhibitors of
APP processing" or "radiolabeled inhibitor of beta-amyloid
production", when applied to uses for in vivo diagnostic imaging,
also includes any ligand that binds to a macromolecule involved in
APP processing or beta-amyloid production with an affinity and
selectivity suitable for in vivo diagnostic imaging. Thus, such
suitable ligand does not need to be an inhibitor of APP processing
or beta-amyloid production. Although the radiolabeled ligand may be
an inhibitor of beta-amyloid production when administered at
therapeutic doses, the relatively low levels of radiolabeled ligand
used in an in vivo diagnostic imaging procedure will generally be
well below such therapeutic levels. Thus, for purposes of in vivo
diagnostic imaging, the term "radiolabeled inhibitor of APP
processing" or "radiolabeled inhibitor of beta-amyloid production"
refers to any suitable radiolabeled compound which binds in vivo to
the same macromolecule target as a compound that is an inhibitor of
APP processing and/or beta-amyloid production as described
herein.
[0316] The present invention includes the above-described method of
in vivo diagnostic imaging comprising administering to a subject a
diagnostically effective amount of a radiolabeled inhibitor of
beta-amyloid production.
[0317] The present invention includes the above-described method of
in vivo diagnostic imaging wherein said method is used in the
diagnosis of a neurological disease which involves APP processing
or elevated levels of beta-amyloid, or both.
[0318] The present invention includes the above-described method of
in vivo diagnostic imaging wherein said method is used in the
diagnosis of Alzheimer's disease.
[0319] The present invention includes the above-described method of
in vivo diagnostic imaging wherein the radiolabeled inhibitor is
suitable for imaging of the brain of the subject.
[0320] The present invention includes the above-described method of
in vivo diagnostic imaging wherein the radiolabeled inhibitor is
radiolabeled with one or more radioisotope selected from .sup.3H,
.sup.11C, .sup.14C, .sup.18F, .sup.32P, .sup.35S, .sup.123I,
.sup.125I, .sup.131I.
[0321] The present invention includes the above-described method of
in vivo diagnostic imaging wherein wherein the inhibitor of
beta-amyloid production is a compound selected from any compound
claimed in or within the scope of compounds claimed in a reference
selected from:
[0322] (1) United States patent U.S. Pat. No. 5,703,129;
[0323] (2) PCT application WO98/22441 (or its priority U.S. Ser.
No. 08/755,444);
[0324] (3) PCT application WO98/22433 (or its priority U.S. Ser.
No. 08/807,538);
[0325] (4) PCT application WO98/22430 (or its priority U.S. Ser.
No. 08/754,895);
[0326] (5) PCT application WO98/22493 (or its priority U.S. Ser.
No. 08/755,334);
[0327] (6) PCT application WO98/22494 (or its priorities U.S. Ser.
No. 08/808,528, 08/807,528 or 08/807,427);
[0328] (7) PCT application WO98/28268 (or its priority U.S. Ser.
No. 08/780,025);
[0329] (8) PCT application WO98/38177;
[0330] (9) PCT application WO95/09838;
[0331] (10) PCT application WO99/67221;
[0332] (11) PCT application WO99/67220;
[0333] (12) PCT application WO99/67219;
[0334] (13) PCT application WO95/66934;
[0335] (14) PCT application WO00/24392;
[0336] (15) Ghosh et al., JACS (2000) 122:3522-2523;
[0337] (16) PCT application No. US99/17717, filed Aug. 7, 1999 and
U.S. patent application No. U.S. Ser. No. 09/370,089, filed Aug. 6,
1999 (now abandoned);
[0338] (17) U.S. patent application Ser. No. 09/506,360, filed Feb.
17, 2000;
[0339] (18) PCT application No. US99/30815, filed Dec. 23, 1999 and
the U.S. patent application Ser. No. 09/469,939, filed Dec. 24,
1999;
[0340] (19) PCT application No. US00/24967 filed Sep. 13, 2000 and
the U.S. patent application Ser. No. 09/661,008, filed Sep. 13,
2000;
[0341] (20) PCT application No. US00/27666 filed Oct. 7, 2000 and
the U.S. patent application Ser. No. 09/684,718, filed Oct. 7,
2000;
[0342] (21) PCT application No. US01/05236 filed Feb. 16, 2001 and
the U.S. patent application Ser. No. 09/788,227, filed Feb. 16,
2001;
[0343] (22) PCT application No. US01/09703 filed Mar. 27, 2001 and
the U.S. patent application Ser. No. 09/817,957, filed Mar. 27,
2001;
[0344] (23) PCT application No. US01/10297 filed Mar. 30, 2001;
[0345] (24) PCT application No. US01/11714 filed Apr. 11, 2001 and
the U.S. patent application Ser. No. 09/832,455, filed Apr. 11,
2001;
[0346] (25) PCT application No. US01/10667 filed Apr. 3, 2001 and
the U.S. patent application Ser. No. 09/825,211, filed Apr. 3,
2001; and
[0347] (26) PCT application No. US01/10773 filed Apr. 3, 2001 and
the U.S. patent application Ser. No. 09/824,945, filed Apr. 3,
2001.
[0348] or any compound which inhibits beta-amyloid production and
binds competitively with any of the foregoing compounds in any of
the assays described in the Utility section hereof; all of which
foregoing references are hereby incorporated by reference in their
entirety.
[0349] The present invention includes the above-described method of
in vivo diagnostic imaging wherein the inhibitor of beta-amyloid
production exhibits activity as an inhibitor in any of the
above-described methods [1]-[15] above.
[0350] The present invention includes the above-described method of
in vivo diagnostic imaging wherein the inhibitor of beta-amyloid
production binds to a macromolecule which is capable of being
identified by any of the above-described methods [19]-[27]
above.
[0351] The present invention includes the above-described method of
in vivo diagnostic imaging wherein the inhibitor of beta-amyloid
production binds to a macromolecule as described above in [28]-[35]
above.
[0352] The present invention includes the above-described method of
in vivo diagnostic imaging wherein the inhibitor of beta-amyloid
production is selected from any of the above-described inhibitors
in [36]-[42] above.
[0353] The present invention includes the above-described method of
in vivo diagnostic imaging wherein the radiolabeled inhibitor of
beta-amyloid production is a radiolabeled tagged inhibitor as
described above [43]-[50] above.
[0354] The present includes the above-described method of in vivo
diagnostic imaging wherein the inhibitor of beta-amyloid production
is selected from:
[0355] (1) an inhibitor of presenilin-1;
[0356] (2) an inhibitor of presenilin-2;
[0357] (3) an inhibitor of .beta. secretase;
[0358] (4) an inhibitor of .alpha. secretase;
[0359] (5) an inhibitor of .gamma. secretase; or
[0360] (6) an inhibitor of BACE/memapsin 2.
[0361] The present invention also provides pharmaceutical
compositions suitable for in vivo diagnostic imaging comprising a
radiolabeled inhibitor of beta-amyloid production. Included in the
present invention are the above-described radiolabeled inhibitors
of beta-amyloid production, wherein the radiolabel is selected from
the group .sup.3H, .sup.11C, .sup.14C, .sup.18F, .sup.32P,
.sup.35S, .sup.123I, .sup.125I, and .sup.131I. Included in the
present invention is a radiopharmaceutical composition comprising a
radiopharmaceutically acceptable carrier and a radiolabeled
inhibitor of beta-amyloid production. Included in the present
invention is a method of determining levels of proteins involved in
beta-amyloid production in a mammal comprising administering to the
mammal a radiopharmaceutical composition comprising a radiolabeled
inhibitor of beta-amyloid production, and imaging said mammal.
Included in the present invention is a method of diagnosing a
disorder associated with beta-amyloid production in a mammal
comprising administering to the mammal a radiopharmaceutical
composition comprising a radiolabeled inhibitor of beta-amyloid
production, and imaging said mammal.
[0362] The present invention includes the above-described
pharmaceutical compositions wherein the composition is used in the
diagnosis of a neurological disease which involves APP processing
or elevated levels of beta-amyloid, or both.
[0363] The present invention includes the above-described
pharmaceutical compositions wherein the composition is used in the
diagnosis of Alzheimer's disease.
[0364] The present invention includes the above-described
pharmaceutical compositions wherein the radiolabeled inhibitor is
suitable for imaging of the brain of the subject.
[0365] The present invention includes the above-described
pharmaceutical compositions wherein the radiolabeled inhibitor is
radiolabeled with one or more radioisotope selected from .sup.3H,
.sup.11C, .sup.14C, .sup.18F, .sup.32P, .sup.35S, .sup.123I,
.sup.125I, .sup.131I.
[0366] The present invention includes the above-described
pharmaceutical compositions wherein the inhibitor of beta-amyloid
production is a compound selected from any compound claimed in or
within the scope of compounds claimed in a reference selected from
Table 2:
2 TABLE 2 (1) United States patent U.S. Pat. No. 5,703,129; (2) PCT
application WO98/22441 (or its priority USSN 08/755,444); (3) PCT
application WO98/22433 (or its priority USSN 08/807,538); (4) PCT
application WO98/22430 (or its priority USSN 08/754,895); (5) PCT
application WO98/22493 (or its priority USSN 08/755,334); (6) PCT
application WO98/22494 (or its priorities USSN 08/808,528,
08/807,528 or 08/807,427); (7) PCT application WO98/28268 (or its
priority USSN 08/780,025); (8) PCT application WO98/38177; (9) PCT
application WO95/09838; (10) PCT application WO99/67221; (11) PCT
application WO99/67220; (12) PCT application WO99/67219; (13) PCT
application WO95/66934; (14) PCT application WO00/24392; (15) Ghosh
et al., JACS (2000) 122: 3522-2523; (16) PCT application No.
US99/17717, filed Aug. 7, 1999 and US patent application No. USSN
09/370,089, filed Aug. 6, 1999 (now abandoned); (17) US patent
application No. 09/506,360, filed Feb. 17, 2000; (18) PCT
application No. US99/30815, filed Dec. 23, 1999 and the US patent
application No. 09/469,939, filed Dec. 24, 1999; (19) PCT
application No. US00/24967 filed Sep. 13, 2000 and the US patent
application No. 09/661,008, filed Sep. 13, 2000; (20) PCT
application No. US00/27666 filed Oct. 7, 2000 and the US patent
application No. 09/684,718, filed Oct. 7, 2000; (21) PCT
application No. US01/05236 filed Feb. 16, 2001 and the US patent
application No. 09/788,227, filed Feb. 16, 2001; (22) PCT
application No. US01/09703 filed Mar. 27, 2001 and the US patent
application No. 09/817,957, filed Mar. 27, 2001; (23) PCT
application No. US01/10297 filed Mar. 30, 2001; (24) PCT
application No. US01/11714 filed Apr. 11, 2001 and the US patent
application No. 09/832,455, filed Apr. 11, 2001; (25) PCT
application No. US01/10667 filed Apr. 3, 2001 and the US patent
application No. 09/825,211, filed Apr. 3, 2001; and (26) PCT
application No. US01/10773 filed Apr. 3, 2001 and the US patent
application No. 09/824,945, filed Apr. 3, 2001.
[0367] or any compound which inhibits beta-amyloid production and
binds competitively with any of the foregoing compounds in any of
the assays described in the Utility section hereof;
[0368] all of which foregoing references are hereby incorporated by
reference in their entirety.
[0369] The present includes the above-described pharmaceutical
composition wherein the inhibitor of beta-amyloid production is
selected from:
[0370] (1) an inhibitor of presenilin-1;
[0371] an inhibitor of presenilin-2;
[0372] (3) an inhibitor of .beta. secretase;
[0373] (4) an inhibitor of .alpha. secretase;
[0374] (5) an inhibitor of .gamma. secretase; or
[0375] (6) an inhibitor of BACE/memapsin 2.
[0376] In a tenth embodiment the present invention provides a
method for diagnosing a neurological disease involving APP
processing and/or the production of beta-amyloid production within
a mammalian body comprising:
[0377] (a) administering a diagnostically effective amount of a
radiopharmaceutical inhibitor of APP processing and/or the
production of beta-amyloid production; and
[0378] (b) imaging the area of the patient wherein the disease is
located.
[0379] In a preferred aspect of the tenth embodiment the present
invention provides a method wherein the radiopharmaceutical
comprises technetium-99m, indium-111, or gallium-68.
[0380] In a preferred aspect of the tenth embodiment the present
invention provides a method wherein the radiopharmaceutical
comprises technetium-99m.
[0381] In a preferred aspect of the tenth embodiment the present
invention provides a method wherein the radiopharmaceutical is a
compound of Formula II:
Q.sup.3-L.sub.n-C.sub.h-M.sub.t-A.sub.L1-A.sub.L2 (II)
[0382] wherein
[0383] Q.sup.3 is an inhibitor of APP processing and/or an
inhibitor of beta-amyloid production;
[0384] L.sub.n is a linking group;
[0385] C.sub.h is a radionuclide metal chelator coordinated to a
transition metal radionuclide M.sub.t;
[0386] M.sub.t is a transition metal radionuclide;
[0387] A.sub.L1 is a first ancillary ligand; and
[0388] A.sub.L2 is a second ancillary ligand capable of stabilizing
the radiopharmaceutical;
[0389] and pharmaceutically acceptable salts thereof.
[0390] In a preferred aspect of the tenth embodiment the present
invention provides a method wherein Q.sup.3 is a radical of a
compound of formula (I): 19
[0391] wherein:
[0392] Q is --NH.sub.2;
[0393] R.sup.3 is C.sub.1-C.sub.6 alkyl substituted with 0-1
R.sup.4;
[0394] R.sup.4 is H, OH, C.sub.1-C.sub.6 alkoxy, C.sub.1-C.sub.6
alkyl, C.sub.2-C.sub.6 alkenyl, C.sub.2-C.sub.6 alkynyl,
C.sub.3-C.sub.10 carbocycle, C.sub.6-C.sub.10 aryl, or 5 to 10
membered heterocycle;
[0395] R.sup.5 is H, OR.sup.14;
[0396] C.sub.1-C.sub.6 alkyl substituted with 0-3 R.sup.5b;
[0397] C.sub.1-C.sub.6 alkoxy substituted with 0-3 R.sup.5b;
[0398] C.sub.2-C.sub.6 alkenyl substituted with 0-3 R.sup.5b;
[0399] C.sub.2-C.sub.6 alkynyl substituted with 0-3 R.sup.5b;
[0400] C.sub.3-C.sub.10 carbocycle substituted with 0-3
R.sup.5c;
[0401] C.sub.6-C.sub.10 aryl substituted with 0-3 R.sup.5c; or
[0402] 5 to 10 membered heterocycle substituted with 0-3
R.sup.5c;
[0403] R.sup.5b, at each occurrence, is independently selected
from:
[0404] H, C.sub.1-C.sub.6 alkyl, CF.sub.3, OR.sup.14, Cl, F, Br, I,
.dbd.O, CN, NO.sub.2, NR.sup.15R.sup.16;
[0405] C.sub.3-C.sub.10 carbocycle substituted with 0-3
R.sup.5c;
[0406] C.sub.6-C.sub.10 aryl substituted with 0-3 R.sup.5c; or
[0407] 5 to 10 membered heterocycle substituted with 0-3
R.sup.5c;
[0408] R.sup.5c, at each occurrence, is independently selected from
H, OH, C.sub.1-C.sub.6 alkyl, C.sub.1-C.sub.4 alkoxy, Cl, F, Br, I,
CN, NO.sub.2, NR.sup.15R.sup.16, or CF.sub.3;
[0409] R.sup.6 is H;
[0410] C.sub.1-C.sub.6 alkyl substituted with 0-3 R.sup.6a;
[0411] C.sub.3-C.sub.10 carbocycle substituted with 0-3 R.sup.6b;
or
[0412] C.sub.6-C.sub.10 aryl substituted with 0-3 R.sup.6b;
[0413] R.sup.6a, at each occurrence, is independently selected from
H, C.sub.1-C.sub.6 alkyl, OR.sup.14, Cl, F, Br, I, .dbd.O, CN,
NO.sub.2, NR.sup.15R.sup.16, phenyl or CF.sub.3;
[0414] R.sup.6b, at each occurrence, is independently selected from
H, OH, C.sub.1-C.sub.6 alkyl, C.sub.1-C.sub.4 alkoxy, Cl, F, Br, I,
CN, NO.sub.2, NR.sup.15R.sup.16, or CF.sub.3;
[0415] W is --(CR.sup.8R.sup.8a).sub.p--;
[0416] p is 0 to 4;
[0417] R.sup.8 and R.sup.8a, at each occurrence, are independently
selected from H, C.sub.1-C.sub.4 alkyl, C.sub.2-C.sub.4 alkenyl,
C.sub.2-C.sub.4 alkynyl and C.sub.3-C.sub.8 cycloalkyl;
[0418] X is a bond;
[0419] C.sub.6-C.sub.10 aryl substituted with 0-3 R.sup.Xb;
[0420] C.sub.3-C.sub.10 carbocycle substituted with 0-3 R.sup.Xb;
or
[0421] 5 to 10 membered heterocycle substituted with 0-3
R.sup.Xb;
[0422] R.sup.Xb, at each occurrence, is independently selected from
H, OH, C.sub.1-C.sub.6 alkyl, C.sub.1-C.sub.4 alkoxy, Cl, F, Br, I,
CN, NO.sub.2, NR.sup.15R.sup.16, or CF.sub.3;
[0423] Y is a bond or
--(CR.sup.9R.sup.9a).sub.t--V--(CR.sup.9R.sup.9a).su- b.u--;
[0424] t is 0 to 3;
[0425] u is 0 to 3;
[0426] R.sup.9 and R.sup.9a, at each occurrence, are independently
selected from H, C.sub.1-C.sub.6 alkyl or C.sub.3-C.sub.8
cycloalkyl;
[0427] V is a bond, --C(.dbd.O)--, --O--, --S--, --S(.dbd.O)--,
--S(.dbd.O).sub.2--, --N(R.sup.19)--, --C(.dbd.O)NR.sup.19b--,
--NR.sup.19bC(.dbd.O)--, --NR.sup.19bS(.dbd.O).sub.2--,
--S(.dbd.O).sub.2NR.sup.19b--, --NR.sup.19bS(.dbd.O)--,
--S(.dbd.O)NR.sup.19b--, --C(.dbd.O)O--, or --OC(.dbd.O)--;
[0428] Z is H;
[0429] C.sub.1-C.sub.8 alkyl substituted with 0-2 R.sup.12;
[0430] C.sub.2-C.sub.4 alkenyl substituted with 0-2 R.sup.12;
[0431] C.sub.2-C.sub.4 alkynyl substituted with 0-2 R.sup.12;
[0432] C.sub.6-C.sub.10 aryl substituted with 0-4 R.sup.12b;
[0433] C.sub.3-C.sub.10 carbocycle substituted with 0-4 R.sup.12b;
or
[0434] 5 to 10 membered heterocycle substituted with 0-3
R.sup.12b;
[0435] R.sup.12 is C.sub.6-C.sub.10 aryl substituted with 0-4
R.sup.12b;
[0436] C.sub.3-C.sub.10 carbocycle substituted with 0-4 R.sup.12b;
or
[0437] 5 to 10 membered heterocycle substituted with 0-3
R.sup.12b;
[0438] R.sup.12b, at each occurrence, is independently selected
from H, OH, C.sub.1-C.sub.6 alkyl, C.sub.1-C.sub.4 alkoxy, Cl, F,
Br, I, CN, NO.sub.2, NR.sup.15R.sup.16, or CF.sub.3;
[0439] B is a 5 to 10 membered lactam, wherein the lactam is
saturated, partially saturated or unsaturated; wherein each
additional lactam carbon is substituted with 0-2 R.sup.11; and,
optionally, the lactam contains a heteroatom selected from --O--,
--S--, --S(.dbd.O)--, --S(.dbd.O).sub.2--, --N.dbd. and
--N(R.sup.10)--;
[0440] R.sup.10 is H, C(.dbd.O)R.sup.17, C(.dbd.O)OR.sup.17,
C(.dbd.O)NR.sup.18R.sup.19, S(.dbd.O).sub.2NR.sup.18R.sup.19,
S(.dbd.O).sub.2R.sup.17;
[0441] C.sub.1-C.sub.6 alkyl optionally substituted with
R.sup.10a;
[0442] C.sub.6-C.sub.10 aryl substituted with 0-4 R.sup.10b;
[0443] C.sub.3-C.sub.10 carbocycle substituted with 0-3 R.sup.10b;
or
[0444] 5 to 10 membered heterocycle optionally substituted with 0-3
R.sup.10b;
[0445] R.sup.10a, at each occurrence, is independently selected
from H, C.sub.1-C.sub.6 alkyl, C.sub.3-C.sub.6 cycloalkyl,
OR.sup.14, Cl, F, Br, I, .dbd.O, CN, NO.sub.2, NR.sup.15R.sup.16,
phenyl or CF.sub.3;
[0446] R.sup.10b, at each occurrence, is independently selected
from H, OH, C.sub.1-C.sub.6 alkyl, C.sub.1-C.sub.4 alkoxy, Cl, F,
Br, I, CN, NO.sub.2, NR.sup.15R.sup.16, or CF.sub.3;
[0447] R.sup.11 is C.sub.1-C.sub.4 alkoxy, Cl, F, Br, I, .dbd.O,
CN, NO.sub.2, NR.sup.18R.sup.19, C(.dbd.O)R.sup.17,
C(.dbd.O)OR.sup.17, C(.dbd.O)NR.sup.18R.sup.19,
S(.dbd.O).sub.2NR.sup.18R.sup.19, CF.sub.3;
[0448] C.sub.1-C.sub.6 alkyl optionally substituted with
R.sup.11a;
[0449] C.sub.6-C.sub.10 aryl substituted with 0-3 R.sup.11b;
[0450] C.sub.3-C.sub.10 carbocycle substituted with 0-3 R.sup.11b;
or
[0451] 5 to 10 membered heterocycle substituted with 0-3
R.sup.11b;
[0452] alternatively, two R.sup.11 substituents on the same carbon
atoms may be combined to form a C.sub.3-C.sub.6 carbocycle;
[0453] alternatively, two R.sup.11 substituents on adjacent carbon
atoms may be combined to form a C.sub.3-C.sub.6 carbocycle or a
benzo fused radical, wherein said benzo fused radical is
substituted with 0-3 R.sup.13;
[0454] R.sup.11a, at each occurrence, is independently selected
from H, C.sub.1-C.sub.6 alkyl, OR.sup.14, Cl, F, Br, I, .dbd.O, CN,
NO.sub.2, NR.sup.15R.sup.16, phenyl or CF.sub.3;
[0455] R.sup.11b, at each occurrence, is independently selected
from H, OH, C.sub.1-C.sub.6 alkyl, C.sub.1-C.sub.4 alkoxy, Cl, F,
Br, I, CN, NO.sub.2, NR.sup.15R.sup.16, or CF.sub.3;
[0456] R.sup.13, at each occurrence, is independently selected from
H, OH, C.sub.1-C.sub.6 alkyl, C.sub.1-C.sub.4 alkoxy, Cl, F, Br, I,
CN, NO.sub.2, NR.sup.15R.sup.16, or CF.sub.3;
[0457] R.sup.14 is H, phenyl, benzyl, C.sub.1-C.sub.6 alkyl, or
C.sub.2-C.sub.6 alkoxyalkyl;
[0458] R.sup.15, at each occurrence, is independently selected from
H, C.sub.1-C.sub.6 alkyl, benzyl, phenethyl,
--C(.dbd.O)--(C.sub.1-C.sub.6 alkyl) and
--S(.dbd.O).sub.2--(C.sub.1-C.sub.6 alkyl);
[0459] R.sup.16, at each occurrence, is independently selected from
H, OH, C.sub.1-C.sub.6 alkyl, benzyl, phenethyl,
--C(.dbd.O)--(C.sub.1-C.sub.6 alkyl) and
--S(.dbd.O).sub.2--(C.sub.1-C.sub.6 alkyl);
[0460] R.sup.17 is H, phenyl, benzyl, C.sub.1-C.sub.6 alkyl, or
C.sub.2-C.sub.6 alkoxyalkyl;
[0461] R.sup.18, at each occurrence, is independently selected from
H, C.sub.1-C.sub.6 alkyl, benzyl, phenethyl,
--C(.dbd.O)--(C.sub.1-C.sub.6 alkyl) and
--S(.dbd.O).sub.2--(C.sub.1-C.sub.6 alkyl); and
[0462] R.sup.19, at each occurrence, is independently selected from
H, OH, C.sub.1-C.sub.6 alkyl, phenyl, benzyl, phenethyl,
--C(.dbd.O)--(C.sub.1-C- .sub.6 alkyl) and
--S(.dbd.O).sub.2--(C.sub.1-C.sub.6 alkyl);
[0463] R.sup.19b is H, C.sub.1-C.sub.6 alkyl, C.sub.3-C.sub.8
cycloalkyl, phenyl, benzyl or phenethyl; and
[0464] R.sup.20 is H or C.sub.1-C.sub.6 alkyl.
[0465] In a preferred aspect of the tenth embodiment the present
invention provides a method wherein Q.sup.3 is an inhibitor of
beta-amyloid production selected from the group consisting of:
[0466] (1) an inhibitor of presenilin-1;
[0467] (2) an inhibitor of presenilin-2;
[0468] (3) an inhibitor of .beta. secretase;
[0469] (4) an inhibitor of .alpha. secretase;
[0470] (5) an inhibitor of .gamma. secretase; and
[0471] (6) an inhibitor of BACE/memapsin 2.
[0472] In a preferred aspect of the tenth embodiment the present
invention provides a method wherein Q.sup.3 is an inhibitor of
beta-amyloid production which is identified by the method of
sceening for inhibitors of beta-amyloid production comprising,
[0473] 1) contacting a potential inhibitor of beta-amyloid
production and a tagged inhibitor of beta-amyloid production with
at least one macromolecule involved in the processing of APP and
the production of beta-amyloid peptide, said macromolecule
containing a binding site specific for said tagged inhibitor of
beta-amyloid production;
[0474] 2) separating the tagged inhibitor of beta-amyloid
production bound to said macromolecule from the tagged inhibitor of
beta-amyloid production free from said macromolecule; and
[0475] 3) determining an inhibitory concentration of the potential
inhibitor of beta-amyloid production from the concentration of
tagged inhibitor of beta-amyloid production bound to said
macromolecule.
[0476] In a preferred aspect of the tenth embodiment the present
invention provides a method wherein L.sub.n is a linking group of
about 5 Angstroms to about 10,000 Angstroms in length.
[0477] In a preferred aspect of the tenth embodiment the present
invention provides a method wherein L.sub.n is linking group of the
formula
-M.sup.31-Y.sup.31(CR.sup.31R.sup.32).sub.f(Z.sup.1).sub.f"Y.sup.32-M.sup-
.32-;
[0478] wherein
[0479] M.sup.31 is
--[(CH.sub.2gZ.sup.31].sub.g'-(CR.sup.31R.sup.32).sub.g- "--;
[0480] M.sup.32 is
--(CR.sup.31R.sup.32).sub.g"-[Z.sup.31(CH.sub.2).sub.g]-
.sub.g'--;
[0481] g is independently 0-10;
[0482] g' is independently 0-1;
[0483] g" is independently 0-10;
[0484] f is independently 0-10;
[0485] f' is independently 0-10;
[0486] f" is independently 0-1;
[0487] Y.sup.31 and Y.sup.32, at each occurrence, are independently
selected from: a direct bond, --O--, --NR.sup.32--, --C(.dbd.O)--,
--C(.dbd.O)O--, --OC(.dbd.O)O--, --C(.dbd.O)NH--,
--C(.dbd.NR.sup.32)--, --S--, --SO--, --SO.sub.2--, --SO.sub.3--,
--NHC(.dbd.O)--, --(NH).sub.2C(.dbd.O)--,
--(NH).sub.2C.dbd.S--;
[0488] Z.sup.31 is independently selected at each occurrence from a
(C.sub.6-C.sub.14) saturated, partially saturated, or aromatic
carbocyclic ring system, substituted with 0-4 R.sup.33; and a
heterocyclic ring system, optionally substituted with 0-4
R.sup.33;
[0489] R.sup.31 and R.sup.32 are independently selected at each
occurrence from: hydrogen; (C.sub.1-C.sub.10)alkyl substituted with
0-5 R.sup.33; alkaryl wherein the aryl is substituted with 0-5
R.sup.33;
[0490] R.sup.33 is independently selected at each occurrence from
the group: hydrogen, --OH, --NHR.sup.34, --C(.dbd.O)R.sup.34,
--OC(.dbd.O)R.sup.34, --OC(.dbd.O)OR.sup.34, --C(.dbd.O)OR.sup.34,
--C(.dbd.O)NR.sup.34, --CN, --SR.sup.34, --SOR.sup.34,
--SO.sub.2R.sup.34, --NHC(.dbd.O)R.sup.34, --NHC(.dbd.O)NHR.sup.34,
or --NHC(.dbd.S)NHR.sup.34; and
[0491] R.sup.34 is independently selected at each occurrence from
the group: hydrogen; (C.sub.1-C.sub.6)alkyl; benzyl, and
phenyl.
[0492] In a preferred aspect of the tenth embodiment the present
invention provides a method wherein:
[0493] L.sub.n is a linking group of the formula
--R.sup.35-G-R.sup.36--;
[0494] R.sup.35 and R.sup.36 are each independently
--N(R.sup.37)C(.dbd.O)--, --C(.dbd.O)N(R.sup.37)--, --OC(.dbd.O)--,
--C(.dbd.O)O--, --O--, --S--, --S(O)--, --SO.sub.2--,
--NR.sup.37--, --C(.dbd.O)--, or a direct bond;
[0495] each R.sup.37 is independently H or
(C.sub.1-C.sub.6)alkyl;
[0496] G is (C.sub.1-C.sub.24)alkyl substituted with 0-3 R.sup.38,
cycloalkyl substituted with 0-3 R.sup.38, aryl substituted with 0-3
R.sup.38, or heterocycle substituted with 0-3 R.sup.38;
[0497] R.sup.38 is .dbd.O, F, Cl, Br, I, --CF.sub.3, --CN,
--CO.sub.2R.sup.39, --C(.dbd.O)R.sup.39,
--C(.dbd.O)N(R.sup.39).sub.2, --CHO, --CH.sub.2OR.sup.39,
--OC(.dbd.O)R.sup.39, --OC(.dbd.O)OR.sup.40, --OR.sup.39,
--OC(.dbd.O)N(R.sup.39).sub.2, --NR.sup.39C(.dbd.O)R.sup.39,
--NR.sup.41C(.dbd.O)OR.sup.40,
--NR.sup.39C(.dbd.O)N(R.sup.39).sub.2,
--NR.sup.39SO.sub.2N(R.sup.39).sub.2, --NR.sup.41SO.sub.2R.sup.40,
--SO.sub.3H, --SO.sub.2R.sup.40, --SR.sup.39, --S(.dbd.O)R.sup.40,
--SO.sub.2N(R.sup.39).sub.2, --N(R.sup.39).sub.2,
--NHC(.dbd.NH)NHR.sup.3- 9, --C(.dbd.NH)NHR.sup.39,
.dbd.NOR.sup.39, --NO.sub.2, --C(.dbd.O)NHOR.sup.39,
--C(.dbd.O)NHNR.sup.39R.sup.40, or --OCH.sub.2CO.sub.2H;
[0498] R.sup.39, R.sup.40, and R.sup.41 are each independently
selected at each occurrence from the group: a direct bond, H, and
(C.sub.1-C.sub.6)alkyl.
[0499] In a preferred aspect of the tenth embodiment the present
invention provides a method wherein:
[0500] C.sub.h is selected from the group:
--R.sup.42N.dbd.N.sup.+.dbd., --R.sup.42R.sup.43N--N.dbd.,
--R.sup.42N.dbd., and --R.sup.42N.dbd.N(H)--, wherein
[0501] R.sup.42 is a direct bond, (C.sub.1-C.sub.10)alkyl
substituted with 0-3 R.sup.44, aryl substituted with 0-3 R.sup.44,
cycloaklyl substituted with 0-3 R.sup.44, heterocycle substituted
with 0-3 R.sup.44, heterocycloalkyl substituted with 0-3 R.sup.44,
aralkyl substituted with 0-3 R.sup.44, or alkaryl substituted with
0-3 R.sup.44;
[0502] R.sup.43 is hydrogen, aryl substituted with 0-3 R.sup.44,
(C.sub.1-C.sub.10)alkyl substituted with 0-3 R.sup.44, and a
heterocycle substituted with 0-3 R.sup.44;
[0503] R.sup.44 is a direct bond, .dbd.O, F, Cl, Br, I, --CF.sub.3,
--CN, --CO.sub.2R.sup.45, --C(.dbd.O)R.sup.45,
--C(.dbd.O)N(R.sup.45).sub.2, --CHO, --CH.sub.2OR.sup.45,
--OC(.dbd.O)R.sup.45, --OC(.dbd.O)OR.sup.46, --OR.sup.45,
--OC(.dbd.O)N(R.sup.45).sub.2, --NR.sup.45C(.dbd.O)R.sup.45,
--NR.sup.47C(.dbd.O)OR.sup.46,
--NR.sup.45C(.dbd.O)N(R.sup.45).sub.2,
--NR.sup.45SO.sub.2N(R.sup.45).sub.2, --NR.sup.47SO.sub.2R.sup.46,
--SO.sub.3H, --SO.sub.2R.sup.46, --SR.sup.45, --S(.dbd.O)R.sup.46,
--SO.sub.2N(R.sup.45).sub.2, --N(R.sup.45).sub.2,
--NHC(.dbd.NH)NHR.sup.4- 5, --C(.dbd.NH)NHR.sup.45,
.dbd.NOR.sup.45, NO.sub.2, --C(.dbd.O)NHOR.sup.45,
--C(.dbd.O)NHNR.sup.45R.sup.46, or --OCH.sub.2CO.sub.2H;
[0504] R.sup.45, R.sup.46, and R.sup.47 are each independently
selected at each occurrence from the group: a direct bond, H, and
(C.sub.1-C.sub.6)alkyl.
[0505] In a preferred aspect of the tenth embodiment the present
invention provides a method wherein C.sub.h is 20
[0506] and is attached to L.sub.n at the carbon designated with a
*
[0507] In a preferred aspect of the tenth embodiment the present
invention provides a method wherein M.sub.t is technetium-99m.
[0508] In a preferred aspect of the tenth embodiment the present
invention provides a method wherein M.sub.t is rhenium-186.
[0509] In a preferred aspect of the tenth embodiment the present
invention provides a method wherein M.sub.t is rhenium-188.
[0510] In a preferred aspect of the tenth embodiment the present
invention provides a method wherein A.sub.L1 is a halide, a
dioxygen ligand, or a functionalized aminocarboxylate.
[0511] In a preferred aspect of the tenth embodiment the present
invention provides a method wherein A.sub.L1 is tricine.
[0512] In a preferred aspect of the tenth embodiment the present
invention provides a method wherein:
[0513] A.sub.L2 is selected from the group: -A.sup.31 and
-A.sup.32-W-A.sup.33;
[0514] A.sup.31 is --PR.sup.91R.sup.92R.sup.93 or
--AsR.sup.91R.sup.92R.su- p.93;
[0515] A.sup.32 and A.sup.33 are each independently
--PR.sup.91R.sup.92 or --AsR.sup.91R.sup.92;
[0516] W is a spacer group selected from the group:
(C.sub.1-C.sub.10)alkyl substituted with 0-3 R.sup.94, aryl
substituted with 0-3 R.sup.94, cycloaklyl substituted with 0-3
R.sup.94, heterocycle substituted with 0-3 R.sup.94,
heterocycloalkyl substituted with 0-3 R.sup.94, aralkyl substituted
with 0-3 R.sup.94 and alkaryl substituted with 0-3 R.sup.94;
[0517] R.sup.91, R.sup.92, and R.sup.93 are independently selected
at each occurrence from the group: (C.sub.1-C.sub.10)alkyl
substituted with 0-3 R.sup.94, aryl substituted with 0-3 R.sup.94,
cycloalkyl substituted with 0-3 R.sup.94, heterocycle substituted
with 0-3 R.sup.94, aralkyl substituted with 0-3 R.sup.94, alkaryl
substituted with 0-3 R.sup.94, and arylalkaryl substituted with 0-3
R.sup.94;
[0518] R.sup.94 is independently selected at each occurrence from
the group: F, Cl, Br, I, --CF.sub.3, --CN, --CO.sub.2R.sup.95,
--C(.dbd.O)R.sup.95, --C(.dbd.C)N(R.sup.95).sub.2,
--CH.sub.2OR.sup.95, --OC(.dbd.O)R.sup.95, --OC(.dbd.O)OR.sup.96,
--OR.sup.95, --OC(.dbd.O)N(R.sup.95).sub.2,
--NR.sup.95C(.dbd.O)R.sup.95, --NR.sup.95C(.dbd.O)OR.sup.95,
--NR.sup.95C(.dbd.O)N(R.sup.95).sub.2, SO.sub.3.sup.-,
--NR.sup.95SO.sub.2N(R.sup.95).sub.2, --NR.sup.95SO.sub.2R.sup.96,
--SO.sub.3H, --SO.sub.2R.sup.95, --S(.dbd.O)R.sup.95,
--SO.sub.2N(R.sup.95).sub.2, --N(R.sup.95).sub.2,
--N(R.sup.95).sub.3.sup.+, --NHC(.dbd.NH)NHR.sup.95,
--C(.dbd.NH)NHR.sup.95, .dbd.NOR.sup.95, --NO.sub.2,
--C(.dbd.O)NHOR.sup.95, --C(.dbd.O)NHNR.sup.95R.sup.96, and
--OCH.sub.2CO.sub.2H; and
[0519] R.sup.95 and R.sup.96 are independently selected at each
occurrence from the group: hydrogen and (C.sub.1-C.sub.6)alkyl.
[0520] In a preferred aspect of the tenth embodiment the present
invention provides a method wherein A.sub.L2 is an ancillary ligand
selected from the group: 21
[0521] wherein
[0522] n is 0 or 1;
[0523] X.sup.1c is independently selected at each occurrence from
the group: CR.sup.84 and N;
[0524] X.sup.2c is independently selected at each occurrence from
the group: CR.sup.84, CR.sup.84R.sup.84, N, NR.sup.84, O and S;
[0525] X.sup.3c is independently selected at each occurrence from
the group: C, CR.sup.84, and N;
[0526] provided the total number of heteroatoms in each ring of the
ligand A.sub.L2 is 1 to 4;
[0527] Y.sup.3 is selected from the group: BR.sup.84-, CR.sup.84,
(P.dbd.O), (P.dbd.S);
[0528] and a, b, c, d, e and f indicate the positions of optional
double bonds, provided that one of e and f is a double bond;
[0529] R.sup.64 is independently selected at each occurrence from
the group:
[0530] H, (C.sub.1-C.sub.10)alkyl substituted with 0-3 R.sup.85,
(C.sub.2-C.sub.10)alkenyl substituted with 0-3 R.sup.85,
(C.sub.2-C.sub.10)alkynyl substituted with 0-3 R.sup.85, aryl
substituted with 0-3 R.sup.85, carbocycle substituted with 0-3
R.sup.85, and R.sup.85;
[0531] or, alternatively, two R.sup.84 may be taken together with
the atom or atoms to which they are attached to form a fused
aromatic, carbocyclic or heterocyclic ring, substituted with 0-3
R.sup.85;
[0532] R.sup.85 is independently selected at each occurrence from
the group: .dbd.O, F, Cl, Br, I, --CF.sub.3, --CN, --NO.sub.2,
--CO.sub.2R.sup.86, --C(.dbd.O)R.sup.86,
--C(.dbd.O)N(R.sup.86).sub.2, --N(R.sup.86).sub.3.sup.+
--CH.sub.2OR.sup.86, --OC(.dbd.O)R.sup.86, --OC(.dbd.O)OR.sup.86a,
--OR.sup.86, --OC(.dbd.O)N(R.sup.86).sub.2,
--NR.sup.86C(.dbd.O)R.sup.86, NR.sup.87C(.dbd.O)OR.sup.86a,
--NR.sup.86C(.dbd.O)N(R.sup.86).sub.2,
--NR.sup.87SO.sub.2N(R.sup.86).sub- .2,
--NR.sup.87SO.sub.2R.sup.86a, --SO.sub.3H, --SO.sub.2R.sup.86a,
--SO.sub.2N(R.sup.86).sub.2, --N(R.sup.86).sub.2,
--OCH.sub.2CO.sub.2H; and
[0533] R.sup.86, R.sup.86a, and R.sup.87 are each independently
selected at each occurrence from the group: hydrogen and
(C.sub.1-C.sub.6)alkyl.
[0534] In a preferred aspect of the tenth embodiment the present
invention provides a method wherein A.sub.L2 is
--PR.sup.48R.sup.49R.sup.50.
[0535] In a preferred aspect of the tenth embodiment the present
invention provides a method wherein R.sup.48, R.sup.49, and
R.sup.50 are each aryl substituted with one R.sup.51
substituent.
[0536] In a preferred aspect of the tenth embodiment the present
invention provides a method wherein each aryl is phenyl.
[0537] In a preferred aspect of the tenth embodiment the present
invention provides a method wherein each R.sup.51 substituent is
SO.sub.3H or SO.sub.3.sup.-, in the meta position.
[0538] In a preferred aspect of the tenth embodiment the present
invention provides a method wherein the radiopharmaceutical is a
compound of Formula V:
Q.sup.3-L.sub.n-C.sub.h-M.sub.t (V)
[0539] wherein
[0540] Q.sup.3 is an inhibitor of APP processing and/or the
production of beta-amyloid production;
[0541] L.sub.n is a linking group of the formula
-M.sup.31-Y.sup.31(CR.sup-
.31R.sup.32).sub.f(Z.sup.1).sub.f"Y.sup.32-M.sup.32-;
[0542] wherein
[0543] M.sup.31 is
--[(CH.sub.2gZ.sup.31].sub.g'-(CR.sup.31R.sup.32).sub.g- "-;
[0544] M.sup.32 is --(CR.sup.31R.sup.32).sub.g"-[Z.sup.31
(CH.sub.2).sub.g].sub.g'--;
[0545] g is independently 0-10;
[0546] g' is independently 0-1;
[0547] g" is independently 0-10;
[0548] f is independently 0-10;
[0549] f' is independently 0-10;
[0550] f" is independently 0-1;
[0551] Y.sup.31 and Y.sup.32, at each occurrence, are independently
selected from: a direct bond, --O--, --NR.sup.32--, --C(.dbd.O)--,
--C(.dbd.O)O--, --OC(.dbd.O)O--, --C(.dbd.O)NH--,
--C(.dbd.NR.sup.32)--, --S--, --SO--, --SO.sub.2--, --SO.sub.3--,
--NHC(.dbd.O)--, --(NH).sub.2C(.dbd.O)--,
--(NH).sub.2C.dbd.S--;
[0552] Z.sup.31 is independently selected at each occurrence from a
(C.sub.6-C.sub.14) saturated, partially saturated, or aromatic
carbocyclic ring system, substituted with 0-4 R.sup.33; and a
heterocyclic ring system, optionally substituted with 0-4
R.sup.33;
[0553] R.sup.31 and R.sup.32 are independently selected at each
occurrence from: hydrogen; (C.sub.1-C.sub.10)alkyl substituted with
0-5 R.sup.33; alkaryl wherein the aryl is substituted with 0-5
R.sup.33;
[0554] R.sup.33 is independently selected at each occurrence from
the group: hydrogen, --OH, --NHR.sup.34, --C(.dbd.O)R.sup.34,
--OC(.dbd.O)R.sup.34, --OC(.dbd.O)OR.sup.34, --C(.dbd.O)OR.sup.34,
--C(.dbd.O)NR.sup.34, --CN, --SR.sup.34, --SOR.sup.34,
--SO.sub.2R.sup.34, --NHC(.dbd.O)R.sup.34, --NHC(.dbd.O)NHR.sup.34,
or --NHC(.dbd.S)NHR.sup.34; and
[0555] R.sup.34 is independently selected at each occurrence from
the group: hydrogen; (C.sub.1-C.sub.6)alkyl; benzyl, and phenyl; Ch
is a radionuclide metal chelator coordinated to a transition metal
radionuclide M.sub.t;
[0556] M.sub.t is a transition metal radionuclide;
[0557] and pharmaceutically acceptable salts thereof.
[0558] In a preferred aspect of the tenth embodiment the present
invention provides a method wherein C.sub.h is selected from the
group: 22
[0559] wherein:
[0560] A.sup.1, A.sup.2, A.sup.3, A.sup.4, A.sup.5, A.sup.6 and
A.sup.7 are independently selected at each occurrence from the
group: NR.sup.60R.sup.61, S, SH, S(Pg), O, OH, PR.sup.62R.sup.63,
P(O)R.sup.62R.sup.73, P(S)R.sup.62R.sup.63,
P(NR.sup.67)R.sup.62R.sup.63;
[0561] J is a direct bond, CH, or a spacer group selected from the
group: (C.sub.1-C.sub.10)alkyl substituted with 0-3 R.sup.72, aryl
substituted with 0-3 R.sup.72, cycloaklyl substituted with 0-3
R.sup.72, heterocycloalkyl substituted with 0-3 R.sup.72, aralkyl
substituted with 0-3 R.sup.72 and alkaryl substituted with 0-3
R.sup.72;
[0562] R.sup.60, R.sup.61, R.sup.62, R.sup.63, and R.sup.64 are
each independently selected from the group: a direct bond,
hydrogen, (C.sub.1-C.sub.10)alkyl substituted with 0-3 R.sup.72,
aryl substituted with 0-3 R.sup.72, cycloaklyl substituted with 0-3
R.sup.72, heterocycloalkyl substituted with 0-3 R.sup.72, aralkyl
substituted with 0-3 R.sup.72' alkaryl substituted with 0-3
R.sup.72substituted with 0-3 R.sup.72 and an electron, provided
that when one of R.sup.70 or R.sup.71 is an electron, then the
other is also an electron, and provided that when one of R.sup.72
or R.sup.73 is an electron, then the other is also an electron;
[0563] additionally, R.sup.60 and R.sup.61 may combine to form
.dbd.C(C.sub.1-C.sub.3)alkyl (C.sub.1-C.sub.3)alkyl;
[0564] R.sup.72 is independently selected at each occurrence from
the group: a direct bond, .dbd.O, F, Cl, Br, I, --CF.sub.3, --CN,
--CO.sub.2R.sup.73, --C(.dbd.O)R.sup.73,
--C(.dbd.O)N(R.sup.73).sub.2, --CHO, --CH.sub.2OR.sup.73,
--OC(.dbd.O)R.sup.73, --OC(.dbd.O)OR.sup.73a, --OR.sup.73,
--OC(.dbd.O)N(R.sup.73).sub.2, --NR.sup.73C(.dbd.O)R.sup.73,
NR.sup.74C(.dbd.O)OR.sup.73a,
--NR.sup.73C(.dbd.O)N(R.sup.73).sub.2, --NR.sup.74
SO.sub.2N(R.sup.73).sub.2, --NR.sup.74 SO.sub.2R.sup.73a,
--SO.sub.3H, --SO.sub.2R.sup.73a, --SR.sup.73,
--S(.dbd.O)R.sup.73a, --SO.sub.2N(R.sup.73).sub.2,
--N(R.sup.73).sub.2, --NHC(.dbd.NH)NHR.sup.7- 3,
--C(.dbd.NH)NHR.sup.73, .dbd.NOR.sup.73, NO.sub.2,
--C(.dbd.O)NHOR.sup.73, --C(.dbd.O)NHNR.sup.73R.sup.73a,
--OCH.sub.2CO.sub.2H, 2-(1-morpholino)ethoxy,
[0565] (C.sub.1-C.sub.5)alkyl, (C.sub.2-C.sub.4)alkenyl,
(C.sub.3-C.sub.6)cycloalkyl, (C.sub.3-C.sub.6)cycloalkylmethyl,
(C.sub.2-C.sub.6) alkoxyalkyl,
[0566] aryl substituted with 0-2 R.sup.73,
[0567] a 5-10-membered heterocyclic ring system containing 1-4
heteroatoms independently selected from N, S, and O;
[0568] R.sup.73, R.sup.73a, and R.sup.74 are independently selected
at each occurrence from the group: a direct bond,
(C.sub.1-C.sub.6)alkyl, phenyl, benzyl, (C.sub.1-C.sub.6)alkoxy,
halide, nitro, cyano, and trifluoromethyl; and
[0569] Pg is a thiol protecting group capable of being displaced
upon reaction with a radionuclide.
[0570] In a preferred aspect of the tenth embodiment the present
invention provides a method wherein C.sub.h is selected from the
group: diethylenetriamine-pentaacetic acid (DTPA);
ethylenediamine-tetraacetic acid (EDTA);
1,4,7,10-tetraazacyclododecane-N,N',N",N'"-tetraacetic acid (DOTA);
1,4,7,10-tetraaza-cyclododecane-N,N',N"-triacetic acid;
hydroxybenzyl-ethylene-diamine diacetic acid;
N,N'-bis(pyridoxyl-5-phosph- ate)ethylene diamine; N,N'-diacetate,
3,6,9-triaza-12-oxa-3,6,9-tricarboxy-
methylene-10-carboxy-13-phenyl-tridecanoic acid;
1,4,7-triazacyclononane-N- ,N',N"-triacetic acid;
1,4,8,11-tetraazacyclo-tetradecane-N,N'N",N'"-tetra- acetic acid;
2,3-bis(S-benzoyl)mercaptoacetamido-propanoic acid.
[0571] In a preferred aspect of the tenth embodiment the present
invention provides a method wherein M.sub.t is indium-111 or
gallium-68.
[0572] In a preferred aspect of the tenth embodiment the present
invention provides a method wherein the neurological disease is
Alzheimer's disease.
[0573] In an eleventh embodiment the present invention provides a
method for diagnosising a neurological disease involving APP
processing and/or the production of beta-amyloid production within
a mammalian body comprising:
[0574] (a) administering a diagnostically effective amount of an
ultrasound contrast agent composition inhibitor of APP processing
and/or the production of beta-amyloid production; and
[0575] (b) imaging the area of the patient wherein the disease is
located.
[0576] In a preferred aspect of the eleventh embodiment the present
invention provides a method for diagnosising a neurological disease
wherein the an ultrasound contrast agent composition is of the
formula
Q.sup.3-L.sub.n-C.sub.h--S.sub.f
[0577] wherein
[0578] Q.sup.3 is an inhibitor of APP processing and/or the
production of beta-amyloid production;
[0579] L.sub.n is a linking group of the formula
-M.sup.31-Y.sup.31(CR.sup-
.31R.sup.32).sub.f(Z.sup.1).sub.f"Y.sup.32-M.sup.32-;
[0580] wherein
[0581] M.sup.31 is
--[(CH.sub.2gZ.sup.31].sub.g'-(CR.sup.31R.sup.32).sub.g- "--;
[0582] M.sup.32 is
--(CR.sup.31R.sup.32).sub.g"-[Z.sup.31(CH.sub.2).sub.g]-
.sub.g'--;
[0583] g is independently 0-10;
[0584] g' is independently 0-1;
[0585] g" is independently 0-10;
[0586] f is independently 0-10;
[0587] f' is independently 0-10;
[0588] f" is independently 0-1;
[0589] Y.sup.31 and Y.sup.32, at each occurrence, are independently
selected from: a direct bond, --O--, --NR.sup.32--, --C(.dbd.O)--,
--C(.dbd.O)O--, --OC(.dbd.O)O--, --C(.dbd.O)NH--,
--C(.dbd.NR.sup.32)--, --S--, --SO--, --SO.sub.2--, --SO.sub.3--,
--NHC(.dbd.O)--, --(NH).sub.2C(.dbd.O)--,
--(NH).sub.2C.dbd.S--;
[0590] Z.sup.31 is independently selected at each occurrence from a
(C.sub.6-C.sub.14) saturated, partially saturated, or aromatic
carbocyclic ring system, substituted with 0-4 R.sup.33; and a
heterocyclic ring system, optionally substituted with 0-4
R.sup.33;
[0591] R.sup.31 and R.sup.32 are independently selected at each
occurrence from: hydrogen; (C.sub.1-C.sub.10)alkyl substituted with
0-5 R.sup.33; alkaryl wherein the aryl is substituted with 0-5
R.sup.33;
[0592] R.sup.33 is independently selected at each occurrence from
the group: hydrogen, --OH, --NHR.sup.34, --C(.dbd.O)R.sup.34,
--OC(.dbd.O)R.sup.34, --OC(.dbd.O)OR.sup.34, --C(.dbd.O)OR.sup.34,
--C(.dbd.O)NR.sup.34, --CN, --SR.sup.34, --SOR.sup.34,
--SO.sub.2R.sup.34, --NHC(.dbd.O)R.sup.34, --NHC(.dbd.O)NHR.sup.34,
or --NHC(.dbd.S)NHR.sup.34; and
[0593] R.sup.34 is independently selected at each occurrence from
the group: hydrogen; (C.sub.1-C.sub.6)alkyl; benzyl, and
phenyl;
[0594] S.sub.f is a surfactant which is a lipid or a compound of
the formula: 23
[0595] A.sup.9 is selected from the group: OH and OR.sup.27;
[0596] A.sup.10 is OR.sup.27;
[0597] R.sup.27 is C(.dbd.O)C.sub.1-20 alkyl;
[0598] E.sup.1 is C.sub.1-10 alkylene substituted with 1-3
R.sup.28;
[0599] R.sup.28 is independently selected at each occurrence from
the group: R.sup.30, --PO.sub.3H--R.sup.30, .dbd.O,
--CO.sub.2R.sup.29, --C(.dbd.O)R.sup.29,
--C(.dbd.O)N(R.sup.29).sub.2, --CH.sub.2OR.sup.29, --OR.sup.29,
--N(R.sup.29).sub.2, C.sub.1-C.sub.5 alkyl, and C.sub.2-C.sub.4
alkenyl;
[0600] R.sup.29 is independently selected at each occurrence from
the group: R.sup.30, H, C.sub.1-C.sub.6 alkyl, phenyl, benzyl, and
trifluoromethyl;
[0601] R.sup.30 is a bond to L.sub.n;
[0602] and a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof.
[0603] In a preferred aspect of the eleventh embodiment the present
invention provides a method wherein the ultrasound contrast agent
composition further comprises:
1,2-dipalmitoyl-sn-glycero-3-phosphotidic acid,
1,2-dipalmitoyl-sn-glycero-3-phosphatidylcholine, and
N-(methoxypolyethylene glycol 5000
carbamoyl)-1,2-dipalmitoyl-sn-glycero--
3-phosphatidylethanolamine.
[0604] In a preferred aspect of the eleventh embodiment the present
invention provides a method wherein the ultrasound contrast agent
composition further comprises an echogenic gas.
[0605] In a preferred aspect of the eleventh embodiment the present
invention provides a method wherein the echogenic gas is C.sub.2-5
perfluorocarbon.
[0606] It is appreciated that certain features of the invention,
which are, for clarity, described in the context of separate
embodiments, may also be provided in combination in a single
embodiment. Conversely, various features of the invention which are
for brevity, described in the context of a single embodiment, may
also be provided separately or in any subcombination.
Definitions
[0607] As used herein, the term "A.beta." denotes the protein
designated A.beta., .beta.-amyloid peptide, and sometimes
.beta./A4, in the art. A.beta. is an approximately 4.2 kilodalton
(kD) protein of about 39 to 43 amino acids found in amyloid
plaques, the walls of meningeal and parenchymal arterioles, small
arteries, capillaries, and sometimes, venules. The isolation and
sequence data for the first 28 amino acids are described in U.S.
Pat. No. 4,666,829. The 43 amino acid sequence is:
3 1 Asp Ala Glu Phe Arg His Asp Ser Gly Tyr 11 Glu Val His His Gln
Lys Leu Val Phe Phe 21 Ala Glu Asp Val Gly Ser Asn Lys Gly Ala 31
Ile Ile Gly Leu Met Val Gly Gly Val Val 41 Ile Ala Thr.
[0608] However, a skilled artisan knows that fragments generated by
enzymatic degradation can result in loss of amino acids 1-10 and/or
amino acids 39-43. Thus, amimo acid sequence 1-43 represents the
maximum sequence of amino acids for A.beta. peptide.
[0609] The term "APP", as used herein, refers to the protein known
in the art as .beta. amyloid precursor protein. This protein is the
precursor for A.beta. and through the activity of "secretase"
enzymes, as used herein, it is processed into A.beta.. Differing
secretase enzymes, known in the art, have been designated .beta.
secretase, generating the N-terminus of A.beta., .alpha. secretase
cleaving around the 16/17 peptide bond in A.beta., and ".gamma.
secretases", as used herein, generating C-terminal A.beta.
fragments ending at position 38, 39, 40, 41, 42, and 43 or
generating C-terminal extended precursors which are subsequently
truncated to the above polypeptides.
[0610] The compounds herein described may have asymmetric centers.
Compounds of the present invention containing an asymmetrically
substituted atom may be isolated in optically active or racemic
forms. It is well known in the art how to prepare optically active
forms, such as by resolution of racemic forms or by synthesis from
optically active starting materials. Many geometric isomers of
olefins, C.dbd.N double bonds, and the like can also be present in
the compounds described herein, and all such stable isomers are
contemplated in the present invention. C is and trans geometric
isomers of the compounds of the present invention are described and
may be isolated as a mixture of isomers or as separated isomeric
forms. All chiral, diastereomeric, racemic forms and all geometric
isomeric forms of a structure are intended, unless the specific
stereochemistry or isomeric form is specifically indicated.
[0611] The term "substituted," as used herein, means that any one
or more hydrogens on the designated atom is replaced with a
selection from the indicated group, provided that the designated
atom's normal valency is not exceeded, and that the substitution
results in a stable compound. When a substituent is keto (i.e.,
.dbd.O), then 2 hydrogens on the atom are replaced.
[0612] When any variable (e.g., R.sup.5b) occurs more than one time
in any constituent or formula for a compound, its definition at
each occurrence is independent of its definition at every other
occurrence. Thus, for example, if a group is shown to be
substituted with 0-2 R.sup.5b, then said group may optionally be
substituted with up to two R.sup.5b groups and R.sup.5b at each
occurrence is selected independently from the definition of
R.sup.5b. Also, combinations of substituents and/or variables are
permissible only if such combinations result in stable
compounds.
[0613] When a bond to a substituent is shown to cross a bond
connecting two atoms in a ring, then such substituent may be bonded
to any atom on the ring. When a substituent is listed without
indicating the atom via which such substituent is bonded to the
rest of the compound of a given formula, then such substituent may
be bonded via any atom in such substituent. Combinations of
substituents and/or variables are permissible only if such
combinations result in stable compounds.
[0614] As used herein, "alkyl", or "alkylene" is intended to
include both branched and straight-chain saturated aliphatic
hydrocarbon groups having the specified number of carbon atoms; for
example, "C.sub.1-C.sub.6 alkyl" denotes alkyl having 1 to 6 carbon
atoms. Examples of alkyl include, but are not limited to, methyl,
ethyl, n-propyl, i-propyl, n-butyl, i-butyl, sec-butyl, t-butyl,
pentyl, and hexyl. Preferred "alkyl", group, unless otherwise
specified, is "C.sub.1-C.sub.4 alkyl".
[0615] As used herein, "alkenyl" or "alkenylene" is intended to
include hydrocarbon chains of either a straight or branched
configuration and one or more unsaturated carbon-carbon bonds which
may occur in any stable point along the chain. Examples of
"C.sub.2-C.sub.6 alkenyl" include, but are not limited to, ethenyl,
1-propenyl, 2-propenyl, 1-butenyl, 2-butenyl, 3-butenyl,
3-methyl-2-butenyl, 2-pentenyl, 3-pentenyl, hexenyl, and the
like.
[0616] As used herein, "alkynyl" or "alkynylene" is intended to
include hydrocarbon chains of either a straight or branched
configuration and one or more carbon-carbon triple bonds which may
occur in any stable point along the chain, such as ethynyl,
1-propynyl, 2-propynyl, 1-butynyl, 2-butynyl, 3-butynyl, and the
like.
[0617] "Alkoxy" or "alkyloxy" represents an alkyl group as defined
above with the indicated number of carbon atoms attached through an
oxygen bridge. Examples of alkoxy include, but are not limited to,
methoxy, ethoxy, n-propoxy, i-propoxy, n-butoxy, s-butoxy,
t-butoxy, n-pentoxy, and s-pentoxy. Preferred alkoxy groups are
methoxy, ethoxy, n-propoxy, i-propoxy, n-butoxy, s-butoxy,
t-butoxy. Similarly, "alkylthio" or "thioalkoxy" is represents an
alkyl group as defined above with the indicated number of carbon
atoms attached through a sulphur bridge.
[0618] "Halo" or "halogen" as used herein refers to fluoro, chloro,
bromo, and iodo. Unless otherwise specified, preferred halo is
fluoro and chloro. "Counterion" is used to represent a small,
negatively charged species such as chloride, bromide, hydroxide,
acetate, sulfate, and the like.
[0619] "Haloalkyl" is intended to include both branched and
straight-chain saturated aliphatic hydrocarbon groups having the
specified number of carbon atoms, substituted with 1 or more
halogen (for example --C.sub.vF.sub.w where v=1 to 3 and w=1 to
(2v+1)). Examples of haloalkyl include, but are not limited to,
trifluoromethyl, trichloromethyl, pentafluoroethyl,
pentachloroethyl, 2,2,2-trifluoroethyl, 2,2-difluoroethyl,
heptafluoropropyl, and heptachloropropyl. "Haloalkoxyl" is intended
to mean a haloalkyl group as defined above with the indicated
number of carbon atoms attached through an oxygen bridge; for
example trifluoromethoxy, pentafluoroethoxy, 2,2,2-trifluoroethoxy,
and the like. "Halothioalkoxy" is intended to mean a haloalkyl
group as defined above with the indicated number of carbon atoms
attached through a sulphur bridge.
[0620] "Cycloalkyl" is intended to include saturated ring groups,
having the specified number of carbon atoms. For example,
"C.sub.3-C.sub.6 cycloalkyl" denotes such as cyclopropyl,
cyclobutyl, cyclopentyl, or cyclohexyl.
[0621] As used herein, "carbocycle" is intended to mean any stable
3- to 7-membered monocyclic or bicyclic or 7- to 13-membered
bicyclic or tricyclic, any of which may be saturated, partially
unsaturated, or aromatic. Examples of such carbocycles include, but
are not limited to, cyclopropyl, cyclobutyl, cyclopentyl,
cyclohexyl, cycloheptyl, adamantyl, cyclooctyl,
[3.3.0]bicyclooctane, cyclononane, [4.4.0]bicyclodecane (decalin),
cyclooctane, fluorenyl, phenyl, naphthyl, indanyl, adamantyl, or
tetrahydronaphthyl (tetralin). Preferred "carbocycle" are
cyclopropyl, cyclobutyl, cyclopentyl, and cyclohexyl.
[0622] As used herein, the term "heterocycle" or "heterocyclic
ring" is intended to mean a stable 5- to 7-membered monocyclic or
bicyclic or 7- to 14-membered bicyclic heterocyclic ring which is
saturated partially unsaturated or unsaturated (aromatic), and
which consists of carbon atoms and 1, 2, 3 or 4 heteroatoms,
preferably 1, 2, or 3 heteroatoms, independently selected from the
group consisting of N, O and S and including any bicyclic group in
which any of the above-defined heterocyclic rings is fused to a
benzene ring. The nitrogen and sulfur heteroatoms may optionally be
oxidized. The heterocyclic ring may be attached to its pendant
group at any heteroatom or carbon atom which results in a stable
structure. The heterocyclic rings described herein may be
substituted on carbon or on a nitrogen atom if the resulting
compound is stable. If specifically noted, a nitrogen in the
heterocycle may optionally be quaternized. It is preferred that
when the total number of S and O atoms in the heterocycle exceeds
1, then these heteroatoms are not adjacent to one another. It is
preferred that the total number of S and O atoms in the heterocycle
is not more than 1.
[0623] Examples of heterocycles include, but are not limited to,
1H-indazole, 2-pyrrolidonyl, 2H,6H-1,5,2-dithiazinyl, 2H-pyrrolyl,
3H-indolyl, 4-piperidonyl, 4aH-carbazole, 4H-quinolizinyl,
6H-1,2,5-thiadiazinyl, acridinyl, azocinyl, benzimidazolyl,
benzofuranyl, benzothiofuranyl, benzothiophenyl, benzoxazolyl,
benzthiazolyl, benztriazolyl, benztetrazolyl, benzisoxazolyl,
benzisothiazolyl, benzimidazalonyl, carbazolyl, 4aH-carbazolyl,
b-carbolinyl, chromanyl, chromenyl, cinnolinyl,
decahydroquinolinyl, 2H, 6H-1,5,2-dithiazinyl,
dihydrofuro[2,3-b]tetrahydrofuran, furanyl, furazanyl,
imidazolidinyl, imidazolinyl, imidazolyl, 1H-indazolyl, indolenyl,
indolinyl, indolizinyl, indolyl, isobenzofuranyl, isochromanyl,
isoindazolyl, isoindolinyl, isoindolyl, isoquinolinyl,
isothiazolyl, isoxazolyl, morpholinyl, naphthyridinyl,
octahydroisoquinolinyl, oxadiazolyl, 1,2,3-oxadiazolyl,
1,2,4-oxadiazolyl, 1,2,5-oxadiazolyl, 1,3,4-oxadiazolyl,
oxazolidinyl, oxazolyl, oxazolidinylperimidinyl, phenanthridinyl,
phenanthrolinyl, phenarsazinyl, phenazinyl, phenothiazinyl,
phenoxathiinyl, phenoxazinyl, phthalazinyl, piperazinyl,
piperidinyl, pteridinyl, piperidonyl, 4-piperidonyl, pteridinyl,
purinyl, pyranyl, pyrazinyl, pyrazolidinyl, pyrazolinyl, pyrazolyl,
pyridazinyl, pyridooxazole, pyridoimidazole, pyridothiazole,
pyridinyl, pyridyl, pyrimidinyl, pyrrolidinyl, pyrrolinyl,
pyrrolyl, quinazolinyl, quinolinyl, 4H-quinolizinyl, quinoxalinyl,
quinuclidinyl, carbolinyl, tetrahydrofuranyl,
tetrahydroisoquinolinyl, tetrahydroquinolinyl,
6H-1,2,5-thiadiazinyl, 1,2,3-thiadiazolyl, 1,2,4-thiadiazolyl,
1,2,5-thiadiazolyl, 1,3,4-thiadiazolyl, thianthrenyl, thiazolyl,
thienyl, thienothiazolyl, thienooxazolyl, thienoimidazolyl,
thiophenyl, triazinyl, 1,2,3-triazolyl, 1,2,4-triazolyl,
1,2,5-triazolyl, 1,3,4-triazolyl, xanthenyl. Preferred 5 to 10
membered heterocycles include, but are not limited to, pyridinyl,
pyrimidinyl, triazinyl, furanyl, thienyl, thiazolyl, pyrrolyl,
pyrazolyl, imidazolyl, oxazolyl, isoxazolyl, tetrazolyl,
benzofuranyl, benzothiofuranyl, indolyl, benzimidazolyl,
1H-indazolyl, oxazolidinyl, isoxazolidinyl, benzotriazolyl,
benzisoxazolyl, oxindolyl, benzoxazolinyl, quinolinyl, and
isoquinolinyl. Preferred 5 to 6 membered heterocycles include, but
are not limited to, pyridinyl, pyrimidinyl, triazinyl, furanyl,
thienyl, thiazolyl, pyrrolyl, piperazinyl, piperidinyl, pyrazolyl,
imidazolyl, oxazolyl, isoxazolyl, tetrazolyl; more preferred 5 to 6
membered heterocycles include, but are not limited to, pyridinyl,
pyrimidinyl, triazinyl, furanyl, thienyl, thiazolyl, piperazinyl,
piperidinyl, pyrazolyl, imidazolyl, and tetrazolyl. Also included
are fused ring and spiro compounds containing, for example, the
above heterocycles.
[0624] As used herein, the term "aryl", "C.sub.6-C.sub.10 aryl" or
aromatic residue, is intended to mean an aromatic moiety containing
the specified number of carbon atoms; for example phenyl, pyridinyl
or naphthyl. Unless otherwise specified, "aryl" may be
unsubstituted or substituted with 0 to 3 groups selected from H,
--OH, --OCH.sub.3, Cl, F, Br, I, CN, --NO.sub.2, --NH.sub.2,
--N(CH.sub.3)H, --N(CH.sub.3).sub.2, --CF.sub.3, --OCF.sub.3,
--C(.dbd.O)CH.sub.3, --SCH.sub.3, --S(.dbd.O)CH.sub.3,
--S(.dbd.O).sub.2CH.sub.3, --CH.sub.3, --CH.sub.2CH.sub.3,
--CO.sub.2H, and --CO.sub.2CH.sub.3.
[0625] The phrase "additional lactam carbons", as used herein, is
intended to denote the number of optional carbon atoms in the
lactam ring B of Formula (I). Formula (I"): (I") 24
[0626] represents the lactam ring B of Formula (I). Additional
lactam carbons are carbons in lactam ring B other than the carbons
numbered 2 and 3 in the backbone of the formula. The additional
lactam carbons may be optionally replaced by a heteroatom selected
from oxygen, nitrogen and sulfur. Lactam ring B contains 1, 2, 3,
4, 5, 6 or 7 optional carbons, wherein one optional carbon may
optionally be replaced by a heteroatom, such that the total number
of members of lactam ring B, including atoms numbered 1, 2 and 3 in
the backbone, does not exceed 10. It is preferred that the total
number of atoms of lactam ring B is 6, 7 or 8; it is more preferred
that the total number of atoms of lactam ring B is seven. Examples
of lactam ring B include: 2526
[0627] but are not intended to limit the invention. Preferred
examples of lactam ring B are B1, B2, B5, B6, B8, B9, B13, and B16;
more preferred examples of lactam ring B are B1, B6, B8, B9, and
B13. Even more preferred examples of lactam ring B are B1 and B6.
Preferred examples of substituent R.sup.10 or R.sup.11 on lactam B
are methyl, ethyl, phenyl, 4-fluorophenyl, 4-chlorophenyl,
4-trifluorophenyl, (4-fluorophenyl)methyl, (4-chlorophenyl)methyl,
and (4-trifluorophenyl)methyl.
[0628] As used herein, "macromolecule" or "complex of
macromolecules", is intended to mean a cellular component involved
directly or indirectly in APP processing and the production of
A.beta. peptide. By indirectly, its effect on APP processing may be
mediated by intervening molecules. An example of a "macromolecule"
or "complex of macromolecules" is presenilin 1 or endogenous
cleavage N terminal or C terminal fragments of presenilin 1.
Additional examples of a "macromolecule" or "complex of
macromolecules" is presenilin 2, a homolog of presenilin 1 or a
homolog of presenilin 2.
[0629] It is envisaged that the scope of "macromolecule" or
"complex of macromolecules" involved in APP processing can be found
in a wide variety of sources. Sources of a "macromolecule" or
"complex of macromolecules" are considered to be materials
suspected or known to contain a macromolecule involved in APP
processing. Examples of a material suspected or known to contain a
macromolecule involved in APP processing include, but are not
limited to, purified proteins; suspensions of proteins; cells,
tissues or organs, derived from prokaryotes or eucaryotes; and
macromolecules derived from recombinant expression systems.
Examples of cells include, but are not limited to, HEK293 cells,
IMR 32 cells, RAJI cells, CHO cells, U-937 cells, and THP-1 cells;
preferably HEK293 or TNP-1 cells. Examples of tissues or organs
include, but are not limited to, spleen, brain, and testes.
Examples of prokaryotes include, but are not limited to, bacteria,
more preferably E. coli. Examples of eucaryotes include, but are
not limited to, mouse, rat, guinea pig, bovine, porcine, monkey,
human, and nematodes (preferably C. elegans). An example of a
suspension of protein includes, but is not limited to, lipid
systems. An example of a macromolecule derived from recombinant
expression systems includes, but is not limited to, C. elegans
knockout of Sel-12 and reintroduction of PS-1. (See Levitan, D. and
Greenwald, I., Nature, 377, pp 351-354, 1995.)
[0630] It is understood that one skilled in the art can readily
determine the scope of the term "binding site" and "specific
binding site" as used herein. For further guidance, the tagged
compounds of the present invention, for example (I-7T), (I-11T),
and (I-43T), bind to a specific site on one or more macromolecules
involved directly or indirectly in APP processing and the
production of A.beta. peptide, and thus effect a decrease in the
production of A.beta. peptide. One skilled in the art can readily
determine whether other compounds, which are inhibitors of
beta-amyloid production, bind to a same site as the tagged
compounds of the present invention by using the assays disclosed
herein. However, it is understood that within the scope of the
present disclosure the phrase "is identified by a compound of
Formula (I-#)" or "is a specific binding site for a compound of
Formula (I-#)" refers to defining the physical site on the
macromolecule wherein a compound of Formula (I-#) binds to and not
to a molecular reaction of binding. Thus, the phrase "a specific
binding site for a compound of Formula (I-#)" does not require the
compound of Formula (I-#) to be present.
[0631] As used herein, "potential inhibitor of beta-amyloid
production" is intended to mean any compound which is being
screened for activity to inhibit the production of beta-amyloid
peptide, or the proteolytic activity leading to the production of
beta-amyloid peptide, using the assay of the invention described
herein. It is understood that a "potential inhibitor of
beta-amyloid production", which is active in the assay of the
invention for inhibiting the production of beta-amyloid peptide,
can subsequently be used in the assay of the invention as a
"beta-amyloid peptide inhibitor", as defined below, once the
compound has been tagged. It is also understood that a "potential
inhibitor of beta-amyloid production", which is active in the assay
of the invention for inhibiting the production of beta-amyloid
peptide, can subsequently be used in pharmaceutical compositions
for the treatment of degenerative neurological disorders involving
beta-amyloid production, preferably for the treatment of
Alzheimer's disease.
[0632] As used herein, "beta-amyloid peptide inhibitor" or
"inhibitor of beta-amyloid production" is intended to mean any
compound which inhibits the production of beta-amyloid peptide, or
the proteolytic activity leading to the production of beta-amyloid
peptide. Examples of a beta-amyloid peptide inhibitor include, but
are not limited to, the scope of compounds of Formula (I), examples
of which are disclosed herein. However, it is contemplated for use
in the invention that compounds beyond the scope of compounds of
Formula (I) may be used in the invention. Additional examples of a
beta-amyloid peptide inhibitor, contemplated by the invention,
include, but are not limited to,
5-amino-6-cyclohexyl-4-hydroxy-hexanamide derivatives disclosed in
United States patent U.S. Pat. No. 5,703,129, issued Dec. 30, 1997;
N-aryl amino acid esters and N-heteroaryl amino acid esters
disclosed in PCT application WO98/22441 (published May 28, 1998;
priority U.S. Ser. No. 08/755,444); N-arylacetyl amino acid amides,
N-heteroarylacetyl amino acid amides, and N-alkylacetyl amino acid
amides disclosed in PCT application WO98/22433 (published May 28,
1998; priority U.S. Ser. No. 08/807,538); N-arylacetyl amino acid
esters N-heteroarylacetyl amino acid esters, and N-alkylacetyl
amino acid esters disclosed in PCT application WO98/22430
(published May 28, 1998; priority U.S. Ser. No. 08/754,895); N-aryl
amino acid derivatives and N-heteroaryl amino acid derivatives
disclosed in PCT application WO98/22493 (published May 28, 1998;
priority U.S. Ser. No. 08/755,334); amino acid derivatives
disclosed in PCT application WO98/22494 (published May 28, 1998;
priority U.S. Ser. No. 08/808,528, 08/807,528, 08/807,427);
cycloalkyl, lactam, lactone and related compounds disclosed in PCT
application WO98/28268 (published Jul. 2, 1998, priority U.S. Ser.
No. 08/780,025); all references of which are hereby incorporated by
reference in their entirety.
[0633] As used herein, "tagged inhibitor of beta-amyloid
production", is intended to mean "beta-amyloid peptide inhibitor"
compounds which are tagged. By "tagged" or "tagged inhibitor of
beta-amyloid production" or "tagged compound", it is meant that the
subject beta-amyloid peptide inhibitor compounds contain a tag
which is suitable for detection in an assay system or upon
administration to a mammal. Suitable tags are known to those
skilled in the art and include, for example, radioisotopes,
fluorescent groups, biotin (in conjunction with streptavidin
complexation), and photoaffinity groups. As used herein,
"radiolabeled compound" or "radiolabeled inhibitor" refers to a
tagged inhibitor of beta-amyloid production wherein the tag is a
radioisotope.
[0634] For purposes of in vivo diagnostic imaging, by
"radiolabeled" it is meant that the subject inhibitors of
beta-amyloid production contain a radioisotope which is suitable
for administration to a mammalian patient. Preferred radioisotopes
for in vivo diagnostic imaging by positron emission tomography
(PET) are .sup.11C, .sup.18F, .sup.123I, and .sup.125I.
[0635] Suitable radioisotopes are known to those skilled in the art
and include, for example, isotopes of halogens (such as chlorine,
fluorine, bromine and iodine), and metals including technetium and
indium. Preferred radioisotopes include .sup.3H, .sup.11C,
.sup.14C, .sup.18F, .sup.32P, .sup.35S, .sup.123I, .sup.125I,
.sup.131I. Radiolabeled compounds of the invention may be prepared
using standard radiolabeling procedures well known to those skilled
in the art. Suitable synthesis methodology is described in detail
below. As discussed below, the beta-amyloid peptide inhibitor
compounds of the invention may be radiolabeled either directly
(that is, by incorporating the radiolabel directly into the
compounds) or indirectly (that is, by incorporating the radiolabel
into the compounds through a chelating agent, where the chelating
agent has been incorporated into the compounds). Also, the
radiolabeling may be isotopic or nonisotopic. With isotopic
radiolabeling, one group already present in the compounds of the
invention described above is substituted with (exchanged for) the
radioisotope. With nonisotopic radiolabeling, the radioisotope is
added to the compounds without substituting with (exchanging for)
an already existing group. Direct and indirect radiolabeled
compounds, as well as isotopic and nonisotopic radiolabeled
compounds are included within the phrase "radiolabeled compounds"
as used in connection with the present invention. Such
radiolabeling should also be reasonably stable, both chemically and
metabolically, applying recognized standards in the art. Also,
although the compounds of the invention may be labeled in a variety
of fashions with a variety of different radioisotopes, as those
skilled in the art will recognize, such radiolabeling should be
carried out in a manner such that the high binding affinity and
specificity of the unlabeled or untagged inhibitor of beta-amyloid
production compounds of the invention to the macromolecule involved
in APP processing is not significantly affected. By not
significantly affected, it is meant that the binding affinity and
specificity is not affected more than about 3 log units, preferably
not more than about 2 log units, more preferably not more than
about 1 log unit, even more preferably not more than about 500%,
and still even more preferably not more than about 250%, and most
preferably the binding affinity and specificity is not affected at
all.
[0636] Examples of a tagged inhibitor of beta-amyloid production
include, but are not limited to, the scope of compounds of Formula
(I), examples of which are disclosed herein. However, it is
contemplated that tagged compounds beyond the scope of compounds of
Formula (I) may be used in the invention. Additional examples of a
tagged inhibitor of beta-amyloid production, contemplated by the
invention, include, but are not limited to, beta-amyloid peptide
inhibitors disclosed in U.S. Pat. No. 5,703,129, issued Dec. 30,
1997; WO98/22441 (published May 28, 1998); WO98/22433 (published
May 28, 1998); WO98/22430 (published May 28, 1998); WO98/22493
(published May 28, 1998); WO98/22494 (published May 28, 1998); and
WO98/28268 (published Jul. 2, 1998), which inhibitors can be tagged
for use in the invention. Preferred examples of a tagged inhibitor
of beta-amyloid production are compounds of Formula (I) and
compounds of WO98/28268 (published Jul. 2, 1998) which can be
tagged. More preferred are compounds of Formula (I).
[0637] For radiolabeled compounds, the label may appear at any
position on the beta-amyloid peptide inhibitor. Preferred
radiolabeled compounds of the invention are beta-amyloid peptide
inhibitor radiolabeled with tritium. More preferred radiolabeled
compounds of the invention are radiolabeled compounds wherein the
radiolabel is located on R.sup.3 of Formula (I).
[0638] As used herein, when the tagged inhibitor of beta-amyloid
production is tagged with a photoaffinity group or photoaffinity
labeled, the term "photoaffinity group" or "photoaffinity labeled"
refers to a substituent on the inhibitor which can be activated by
photolysis at an appropriate wavelength to undergo a crosslinking
photochemical reaction with the macromolecule to which it is
associated. An example of a "photoaffinity group" is a benzophenone
substituent.
[0639] In the present invention it has also been discovered that
the radiolabeled compounds above are useful as inhibitors of
beta-amyloid peptide production and thus the radiolabeled compounds
of the invention may also be employed for therapeutic purposes, in
addition to the diagnostic usage described above.
[0640] As used herein, "inhibitory concentration" is intended to
mean the concentration at which the "potential inhibitor of
beta-amyloid production" compound screened in the assay of the
invention inhibits a measurable percentage of beta-amyloid peptide
production. Examples of "inhibitory concentration" values range
from IC.sub.50 to IC.sub.90, and are preferably, IC.sub.50,
IC.sub.60, IC.sub.70, IC.sub.80, or IC.sub.90, which represent 50%,
60%, 70%, 80% and 90% reduction in beta-amyloid peptide production,
respectively. More preferably, the "inhibitory concentration" is
measured as the IC.sub.50 value. It is understood that an
designation for IC.sub.50 is the half maximal inhibitory
concentration.
[0641] The phrase "pharmaceutically acceptable" is employed herein
to refer to those compounds, materials, compositions, and/or dosage
forms which are, within the scope of sound medical judgment,
suitable for use in contact with the tissues of human beings and
animals without excessive toxicity, irritation, allergic response,
or other problem or complication, commensurate with a reasonable
benefit/risk ratio.
[0642] As used herein, "pharmaceutically acceptable salts" refer to
derivatives of the disclosed compounds wherein the parent compound
is modified by making acid or base salts thereof. Examples of
pharmaceutically acceptable salts include, but are not limited to,
mineral or organic acid salts of basic residues such as amines;
alkali or organic salts of acidic residues such as carboxylic
acids; and the like. The pharmaceutically acceptable salts include
the conventional non-toxic salts or the quaternary ammonium salts
of the parent compound formed, for example, from non-toxic
inorganic or organic acids. For example, such conventional
non-toxic salts include those derived from inorganic acids such as
hydrochloric, hydrobromic, sulfuric, sulfamic, phosphoric, nitric
and the like; and the salts prepared from organic acids such as
acetic, propionic, succinic, glycolic, stearic, lactic, malic,
tartaric, citric, ascorbic, pamoic, maleic, hydroxymaleic,
phenylacetic, glutamic, benzoic, salicylic, sulfanilic,
2-acetoxybenzoic, fumaric, benzenesulfonic, toluenesulfonic,
methanesulfonic, ethane disulfonic, oxalic, isethionic, and the
like.
[0643] The pharmaceutically acceptable salts of the present
invention can be synthesized from the parent compound which
contains a basic or acidic moiety by conventional chemical methods.
Generally, such salts can be prepared by reacting the free acid or
base forms of these compounds with a stoichiometric amount of the
appropriate base or acid in water or in an organic solvent, or in a
mixture of the two; generally, nonaqueous media like ether, ethyl
acetate, ethanol, isopropanol, or acetonitrile are preferred. Lists
of suitable salts are found in Remington's Pharmaceutical Sciences,
17th ed., Mack Publishing Company, Easton, Pa., 1985, p. 1418, the
disclosure of which is hereby incorporated by reference.
[0644] "Stable compound" and "stable structure" are meant to
indicate a compound that is sufficiently robust to survive
isolation to a useful degree of purity from a reaction mixture, and
formulation into an efficacious therapeutic agent.
[0645] The term "metallopharmaceutical" means a pharmaceutical
comprising a metal. The metal is the cause of the imageable signal
in diagnostic applications and the source of the cytotoxic
radiation in radiotherapeutic applications. Radiopharmaceuticals
are metallopharmaceuticals in which the metal is a
radioisotope.
[0646] By "reagent" is meant a compound of this invention capable
of direct transformation into a metallopharmaceutical of this
invention. Reagents may be utilized directly for the preparation of
the metallopharmaceuticals of this invention or may be a component
in a kit of this invention.
[0647] The term "binding agent" means a metallopharmaceutical of
this invention having affinity for and capable of binding a binding
site specific for said tagged inhibitor of beta-amyloid
production.
[0648] A "cyclodextrin" is a cyclic oligosaccharide. Examples of
cyclodextrins include, but are not limited to,
.alpha.-cyclodextrin, hydroxyethyl-.alpha.-cyclodextrin,
hydroxypropyl-.alpha.-cyclodextrin, .beta.-cyclodextrin,
hydroxypropyl-.beta.-cyclodextrin,
carboxymethyl-.beta.-cyclodextrin,
dihydroxypropyl-.beta.-cyclodextrin,
hydroxyethyl-.beta.-cyclodextrin, 2,6
di-O-methyl-.beta.-cyclodextrin, sulfated-.beta.-cyclodextrin,
.gamma.-cyclodextrin, hydroxypropyl-.gamma.-cyclodextrin,
dihydroxypropyl-.gamma.-cyclodextrin,
hydroxyethyl-.gamma.-cyclodextrin, and sulfated
.gamma.-cyclodextrin.
[0649] As used herein, the term "polycarboxyalkyl" means an alkyl
group having between two and about 100 carbon atoms and a plurality
of carboxyl substituents; and the term "polyazaalkyl" means a
linear or branched alkyl group having between two and about 100
carbon atoms, interrupted by or substituted with a plurality of
amine groups.
[0650] A "reducing agent" is a compound that reacts with a
radionuclide, which is typically obtained as a relatively
unreactive, high oxidation state compound, to lower its oxidation
state by transferring electron(s) to the radionuclide, thereby
making it more reactive. Reducing agents useful in the preparation
of radiopharmaceuticals and in diagnostic kits useful for the
preparation of said radiopharmaceuticals include but are not
limited to stannous chloride, stannous fluoride, formamidine
sulfinic acid, ascorbic acid, cysteine, phosphines, and cuprous or
ferrous salts. Other reducing agents are described in Brodack et.
al., PCT Application 94/22496, which is incorporated herein by
reference.
[0651] A "transfer ligand" is a ligand that forms an intermediate
complex with a metal ion that is stable enough to prevent unwanted
side-reactions but labile enough to be converted to a
metallopharmaceutical. The formation of the intermediate complex is
kinetically favored while the formation of the
metallopharmaceutical is thermodynamically favored. Transfer
ligands useful in the preparation of metallopharmaceuticals and in
diagnostic kits useful for the preparation of diagnostic
radiopharmaceuticals include but are not limited to gluconate,
glucoheptonate, mannitol, glucarate,
N,N,N',N'-ethylenediaminetetraacetic acid, pyrophosphate and
methylenediphosphonate. In general, transfer ligands are comprised
of oxygen or nitrogen donor atoms.
[0652] The term "donor atom" refers to the atom directly attached
to a metal by a chemical bond.
[0653] "Ancillary" or "co-ligands" are ligands that are
incorporated into a radiopharmaceutical during its synthesis. They
serve to complete the coordination sphere of the radionuclide
together with the chelator or radionuclide bonding unit of the
reagent. For radiopharmaceuticals comprised of a binary ligand
system, the radionuclide coordination sphere is composed of one or
more chelators or bonding units from one or more reagents and one
or more ancillary or co-ligands, provided that there are a total of
two types of ligands, chelators or bonding units. For example, a
radiopharmaceutical comprised of one chelator or bonding unit from
one reagent and two of the same ancillary or co-ligands and a
radiopharmaceutical comprised of two chelators or bonding units
from one or two reagents and one ancillary or co-ligand are both
considered to be comprised of binary ligand systems. For
radiopharmaceuticals comprised of a ternary ligand system, the
radionuclide coordination sphere is composed of one or more
chelators or bonding units from one or more reagents and one or
more of two different types of ancillary or co-ligands, provided
that there are a total of three types of ligands, chelators or
bonding units. For example, a radiopharmaceutical comprised of one
chelator or bonding unit from one reagent and two different
ancillary or co-ligands is considered to be comprised of a ternary
ligand system.
[0654] Ancillary or co-ligands useful in the preparation of
radiopharmaceuticals and in diagnostic kits useful for the
preparation of said radiopharmaceuticals are comprised of one or
more oxygen, nitrogen, carbon, sulfur, phosphorus, arsenic,
selenium, and tellurium donor atoms. A ligand can be a transfer
ligand in the synthesis of a radiopharmaceutical and also serve as
an ancillary or co-ligand in another radiopharmaceutical. Whether a
ligand is termed a transfer or ancillary or co-ligand depends on
whether the ligand remains in the radionuclide coordination sphere
in the radiopharmaceutical, which is determined by the coordination
chemistry of the radionuclide and the chelator or bonding unit of
the reagent or reagents.
[0655] A "chelator" or "bonding unit" is the moiety or group on a
reagent that binds to a metal ion through the formation of chemical
bonds with one or more donor atoms.
[0656] A "diagnostic kit" or "kit" comprises a collection of
components, termed the formulation, in one or more vials which are
used by the practicing end user in a clinical or pharmacy setting
to synthesize diagnostic radiopharmaceuticals. The kit provides all
the requisite components to synthesize and use the diagnostic
radiopharmaceutical except those that are commonly available to the
practicing end user, such as water or saline for injection, a
solution of the radionuclide, equipment for heating the kit during
the synthesis of the radiopharmaceutical, if required, equipment
necessary for administering the radiopharmaceutical to the patient
such as syringes and shielding, and imaging equipment.
[0657] A "lyophilization aid" is a component that has favorable
physical properties for lyophilization, such as the glass
transition temperature, and is added to the formulation to improve
the physical properties of the combination of all the components of
the formulation for lyophilization.
[0658] A "stabilization aid" is a component that is added to the
metallopharmaceutical or to the diagnostic kit either to stabilize
the metallopharmaceutical or to prolong the shelf-life of the kit
before it must be used. Stabilization aids can be antioxidants,
reducing agents or radical scavengers and can provide improved
stability by reacting preferentially with species that degrade
other components or the metallopharmaceutical.
[0659] A "solubilization aid" is a component that improves the
solubility of one or more other components in the medium required
for the formulation.
[0660] A "bacteriostat" is a component that inhibits the growth of
bacteria in a formulation either during its storage before use of
after a diagnostic kit is used to synthesize a
radiopharmaceutical.
[0661] As used herein, the term "bubbles", as used herein, refers
to vesicles which are generally characterized by the presence of
one or more membranes or walls surrounding an internal void that is
filled with a gas or precursor thereto. Exemplary bubbles include,
for example, liposomes, micelles and the like.
[0662] As used herein, the term "lipid" refers to a synthetic or
naturally-occurring amphipathic compound which comprises a
hydrophilic component and a hydrophobic component. Lipids include,
for example, fatty acids, neutral fats, phosphatides, glycolipids,
aliphatic alchols and waxes, terpenes and steroids.
[0663] As used herein, the term "lipid composition" refers to a
composition which comprises a lipid compound. Exemplary lipid
compositions include suspensions, emulsions and vesicular
compositions.
[0664] As used herein, the term "lipid formulation" refers to a
composition which comprises a lipid compound and a bioactive
agent.
[0665] As used herein, the term "vesicle" refers to a spherical
entity which is characterized by the presence of an internal void.
Preferred vesicles are formulated from lipids, including the
various lipids described herein. In any given vesicle, the lipids
may be in the form of a monolayer or bilayer, and the mono- or
bilayer lipids may be used to form one of more mono- or bilayers.
In the case of more than one mono- or bilayer, the mono- or
bilayers are generally concentric. The lipid vesicles described
herein include such entities commonly referred to as liposomes,
micelles, bubbles, microbubbles, microspheres and the like. Thus,
the lipids may be used to form a unilamellar vesicle (comprised of
one monolayer or bilayer), an oligolamellar vesicle (comprised of
about two or about three monolayers or bilayers) or a multilamellar
vesicle (comprised of more than about three monolayers or
bilayers). The internal void of the vesicles may be filled with a
liquid, including, for example, an aqueous liquid, a gas, a gaseous
precursor, and/or a solid or solute material, including, for
example, a bioactive agent, as desired.
[0666] As used herein, the term "vesicular composition" refers to a
composition which is formulate from lipids and which comprises
vesicles.
[0667] As used herein, the term "vesicle formulation" refers to a
composition which comprises vesicles and a bioactive agent.
[0668] As used herein, the term "lipsomes" refers to a generally
spherical cluster or aggregate of amphipathic compounds, including
lipid compounds, typically in the form of one or more concentric
layers, for example, bilayers. They may also be referred to herein
as lipid vesicles.
[0669] The ultrasound contrast agents of the present invention
comprise a plurality of inhibitors of beta-amyloid production
attached to or incorporated into a microbubble of a biocompatible
gas, a liquid carrier, and a surfactant microsphere, further
comprising an optional linking moiety, L.sub.n, between the
targeting moieties and the microbubble. In this context, the term
liquid carrier means aqueous solution and the term surfactant means
any amphiphilic material which produces a reduction in interfacial
tension in a solution. A list of suitable surfactants for forming
surfactant microspheres is disclosed in EP0727225A2, herein
incorporated by reference. The term surfactant microsphere includes
nanospheres, liposomes, vesicles and the like. The biocompatible
gas can be air, or a fluorocarbon, such as a C.sub.3-C.sub.5
perfluoroalkane, which provides the difference in echogenicity and
thus the contrast in ultrasound imaging. The gas is encapsulated or
contained in the microsphere to which is attached the biodirecting
group, optionally via a linking group. The attachment can be
covalent, ionic or by van der Waals forces. Specific examples of
such contrast agents include lipid encapsulated perfluorocarbons
with a plurality inhibitors of beta-amyloid production.
[0670] X-ray contrast agents of the present invention are comprised
of one or more inhibitors of beta-amyloid production attached to
one or more X-ray absorbing or "heavy" atoms of atomic number 20 or
greater, further comprising an optional linking moiety, L.sub.n,
between the targeting moieties and the X-ray absorbing atoms. The
frequently used heavy atom in X-ray contrast agents is iodine.
Recently, X-ray contrast agents comprised of metal chelates
(Wallace, R., U.S. Pat. No. 5,417,959) and polychelates comprised
of a plurality of metal ions (Love, D., U.S. Pat. No. 5,679,810)
have been disclosed. More recently, multinuclear cluster complexes
have been disclosed as X-ray contrast agents (U.S. Pat. No.
5,804,161, PCT WO91/14460, and PCT WO 92/17215).
[0671] MRI contrast agents of the present invention are comprised
of one or more inhibitors of beta-amyloid production attached to
one or more paramagnetic metal ions, further comprising an optional
linking moiety, L.sub.n, between the targeting moieties and the
paramagnetic metal ions. The paramagnetic metal ions are present in
the form of metal complexes or metal oxide particles. U.S. Pat.
Nos. 5,412,148, and 5,760,191, describe examples of chelators for
paramagnetic metal ions for use in MRI contrast agents. U.S. Pat.
No. 5,801,228, U.S. Pat. No. 5,567,411, and U.S. Pat. No.
5,281,704, describe examples of polychelants useful for complexing
more than one paramagnetic metal ion for use in MRI contrast
agents. U.S. Pat. No. 5,520,904, describes particulate compositions
comprised of paramagnetic metal ions for use as MRI contrast
agents.
[0672] The pharmaceuticals of the present invention have the
formulae, (Q.sup.3).sub.d-L.sub.n-(C.sub.h--X),
(Q.sup.3)d-L.sub.n-(C.sub.h--X.sup.- 1).sub.d',
(Q.sup.3)d-L.sub.n-(X.sup.2).sub.d", and
(Q.sup.3)d-L.sub.n-(X.sup.3), wherein Q.sup.3 represents an
inhibitor of beta-amyloid production, d is 1-10, L.sub.n represents
an optional linking group, C.sub.h represents a metal chelator or
bonding moiety, X represents a radioisotope, X.sup.1 represents
paramagnetic metal ion, X.sup.2 represents a paramagnetic metal ion
or heavy atom containing insoluble solid particle, d" is 1-100, and
X.sup.3 represents a surfactant microsphere of an echogenic
gas.
[0673] The pharmaceuticals of the present invention can be
synthesized by several approaches. One approach involves the
synthesis of the inhibitor of beta-amyloid production, Q.sup.3, and
direct attachment of one or more moieties, Q.sup.3, to one or more
metal chelators or bonding moieties, C.sub.h, or to a paramagnetic
metal ion or heavy atom containing solid particle, or to an
echogenic gas microbubble. Another approach involves the attachment
of one or more moieties, Q.sup.3, to the linking group, L.sub.n,
which is then attached to one or more metal chelators or bonding
moieties, C.sub.h, or to a paramagnetic metal ion or heavy atom
containing solid particle, or to an echogenic gas microbubble.
Another approach involves the synthesis of an inhibitor of
beta-amyloid production, Q.sup.3, bearing a fragment of the linking
group, L.sub.n, one or more of which are then attached to the
remainder of the linking group and then to one or more metal
chelators or bonding moieties, C.sub.h, or to a paramagnetic metal
ion or heavy atom containing solid particle, or to an echogenic gas
microbubble.
[0674] The inhibitor of beta-amyloid production, Q.sup.3,
optionally bearing a linking group, L.sub.n, or a fragment of the
linking group, can be synthesized using standard synthetic methods
known to those skilled in the art. Preferred methods include but
are not limited to those methods described below.
[0675] The attachment of linking groups, L.sub.n, to the inhibitor
of beta-amyloid production, Q.sup.3; chelators or bonding units,
C.sub.h, to the inhibitor of beta-amyloid production, Q.sup.3, or
to the linking groups, L.sub.n; and non-peptides, bearing a
fragment of the linking group to the remainder of the linking
group, in combination forming the moiety, (Q.sup.3)d-L.sub.n, and
then to the moiety C.sub.h; can all be performed by standard
techniques. These include, but are not limited to, amidation,
esterification, alkylation, and the formation of ureas or
thioureas. Procedures for performing these attachments can be found
in Brinkley, M., Bioconjugate Chemistry 1992, 3(1), which is
incorporated herein by reference.
[0676] A number of methods can be used to attach the inhibitor of
beta-amyloid production, Q.sup.3, to paramagnetic metal ion or
heavy atom containing solid particles, X.sup.2, by one of skill in
the art of the surface modification of solid particles. In general,
the inhibitor of beta-amyloid production Q.sup.3 or the combination
(Q.sup.3).sub.dL.sub.n is attached to a coupling group that react
with a constituent of the surface of the solid particle. The
coupling groups can be any of a number of silanes which react with
surface hydroxyl groups on the solid particle surface, as described
in co-pending U.S. patent application Ser. No. 09/356,178, and can
also include polyphosphonates, polycarboxylates, polyphosphates or
mixtures thereof which couple with the surface of the solid
particles, as described in U.S. Pat. No. 5,520,904.
[0677] A number of reaction schemes can be used to attach the
inhibitor of beta-amyloid production, Q.sup.3, to the surfactant
microsphere, X.sup.3. These are illustrated in following reaction
schemes where S.sub.f represents a surfactant moiety that forms the
surfactant microsphere.
[0678] Acylation Reaction:
S.sub.f--C(.dbd.O)--Y+Q.sup.3-NH.sub.2 or
.fwdarw.S.sub.f--C(.dbd.O)--NH-Q
or
S.sub.f--C(.dbd.O)--Y+Q.sup.3-OH or
.fwdarw.S.sub.f--C(.dbd.O)--O-Q
[0679] wherein Y is a leaving group or active ester
[0680] Disulfide Coupling:
S.sub.f--SH+Q.sup.3-SH.fwdarw.S.sub.f--S--S-Q
[0681] Sulfonamide Coupling:
S.sub.f--S(.dbd.O).sub.2--Y+Q.sup.3-NH.sub.2.fwdarw.S.sub.f--S(.dbd.O).sub-
.2--NH-Q
[0682] Reductive Amidation:
S.sub.f--CHO+Q.sup.3-NH.sub.2.fwdarw.S.sub.f--NH-Q
[0683] In these reaction schemes, the substituents S.sub.f and Q
can be reversed as well.
[0684] The linking group L.sub.n can serve several roles. First it
provides a spacing group between the metal chelator or bonding
moiety, C.sub.h, the paramagnetic metal ion or heavy atom
containing solid particle, X.sup.2, and the surfactant microsphere,
X.sup.3, and the one or more of the inhibitors of beta-amyloid
production, Q.sup.3, so as to minimize the possibility that the
moieties C.sub.h--X, C.sub.h--X.sup.1, X.sup.2, and X.sup.3, will
interfere with the interaction of the recognition site of Q.sup.3
with receptor associated with beta-amyloid production. The
necessity of incorporating a linking group in a reagent is
dependent on the identity of Q.sup.3, C.sub.h--X, C.sub.h--X.sup.1,
X.sup.2, and X.sup.3. If C.sub.h--X, C.sub.h--X.sup.1, X.sup.2, and
X.sup.3, cannot be attached to Q without substantially diminishing
its affinity for the receptors, then a linking group is used. A
linking group also provides a means of independently attaching
multiple non-peptides, Q.sup.3, to one group that is attached to
C.sub.h--X, C.sub.h--X.sup.1, X.sup.2, or X.sup.3.
[0685] The linking group also provides a means of incorporating a
pharmacokinetic modifier into the pharmaceuticals of the present
invention. The pharmacokinetic modifier serves to direct the
biodistibution of the injected pharmaceutical other than by the
interaction of the inhibitor of beta-amyloid production, Q.sup.3,
with the receptor associated with beta-amyloid production. A wide
variety of functional groups can serve as pharmacokinetic
modifiers, including, but not limited to, carbohydrates,
polyalkylene glycols, peptides or other polyamino acids, and
cyclodextrins. The modifiers can be used to enhance or decrease
hydrophilicity and to enhance or decrease the rate of blood
clearance. The modifiers can also be used to direct the route of
elimination of the pharmaceuticals. Preferred pharmacokinetic
modifiers are those that result in moderate to fast blood clearance
and enhanced renal excretion.
[0686] The metal chelator or bonding moiety, C.sub.h, is selected
to form stable complexes with the metal ion chosen for the
particular application. Chelators or bonding moieties for
diagnostic radiopharmaceuticals are selected to form stable
complexes with the radioisotopes that have imageable gamma ray or
positron emissions, such as .sup.99mTc, .sup.95Tc, .sup.111In,
.sup.62Cu, .sup.60Cu, .sup.64Cu, .sup.67Ga, .sup.68Ga,
.sup.86Y.
[0687] Chelators for technetium, copper and gallium isotopes are
selected from diaminedithiols, monoamine-monoamidedithiols,
triamide-monothiols, monoamine-diamide-monothiols, diaminedioximes,
and hydrazines. The chelators are generally tetradentate with donor
atoms selected from nitrogen, oxygen and sulfur. Preferred reagents
are comprised of chelators having amine nitrogen and thiol sulfur
donor atoms and hydrazine bonding units. The thiol sulfur atoms and
the hydrazines may bear a protecting group which can be displaced
either prior to using the reagent to synthesize a
radiopharmaceutical or preferably in situ during the synthesis of
the radiopharmaceutical.
[0688] Exemplary thiol protecting groups include those listed in
Greene and Wuts, "Protective Groups in Organic Synthesis" John
Wiley & Sons, New York (1991), the disclosure of which is
hereby incorporated by reference. Any thiol protecting group known
in the art can be used. Examples of thiol protecting groups
include, but are not limited to, the following: acetamidomethyl,
benzamidomethyl, 1-ethoxyethyl, benzoyl, and triphenylmethyl.
[0689] Exemplary protecting groups for hydrazine bonding units are
hydrazones which can be aldehyde or ketone hydrazones having
substituents selected from hydrogen, alkyl, aryl and heterocycle.
Particularly preferred hydrazones are described in co-pending U.S.
Ser. No. 08/476,296 the disclosure of which is herein incorporated
by reference in its entirety.
[0690] The hydrazine bonding unit when bound to a metal
radionuclide is termed a hydrazido, or diazenido group and serves
as the point of attachment of the radionuclide to the remainder of
the radiopharmaceutical. A diazenido group can be either terminal
(only one atom of the group is bound to the radionuclide) or
chelating. In order to have a chelating diazenido group at least
one other atom of the group must also be bound to the radionuclide.
The atoms bound to the metal are termed donor atoms.
[0691] Chelators for .sup.111In and .sup.86Y are selected from
cyclic and acyclic polyaminocarboxylates such as DTPA, DOTA, DO3A,
2-benzyl-DOTA,
alpha-(2-phenethyl)1,4,7,10-tetraazazcyclododecane-1-acetic-4,7,10-tris(m-
ethylacetic)acid, 2-benzyl-cyclohexyldiethylenetriaminepentaacetic
acid, 2-benzyl-6-methyl-DTPA, and
6,6"-bis[N,N,N",N"-tetra(carboxymethyl)aminom-
ethyl)-4'-(3-amino-4-methoxyphenyl)-2,2':6',2'-terpyridine.
Procedures for synthesizing these chelators that are not
commercially available can be found in Brechbiel, M. and Gansow,
O., J. Chem. Soc. Perkin Trans. 1992, 1, 1175; Brechbiel, M. and
Gansow, O., Bioconjugate Chem. 1991, 2, 187; Deshpande, S., et.
al., J. Nucl. Med. 1990, 31, 473; Kruper, J., U.S. Pat. No.
5,064,956, and Toner, J., U.S. Pat. No. 4,859,777, the disclosures
of which are hereby incorporated by reference in their
entirety.
[0692] The coordination sphere of metal ion includes all the
ligands or groups bound to the metal. For a transition metal
radionuclide to be stable it typically has a coordination number
(number of donor atoms) comprised of an integer greater than or
equal to 4 and less than or equal to 8; that is there are 4 to 8
atoms bound to the metal and it is said to have a complete
coordination sphere. The requisite coordination number for a stable
radionuclide complex is determined by the identity of the
radionuclide, its oxidation state, and the type of donor atoms. If
the chelator or bonding unit does not provide all of the atoms
necessary to stabilize the metal radionuclide by completing its
coordination sphere, the coordination sphere is completed by donor
atoms from other ligands, termed ancillary or co-ligands, which can
also be either terminal or chelating.
[0693] A large number of ligands can serve as ancillary or
co-ligands, the choice of which is determined by a variety of
considerations such as the ease of synthesis of the
radiopharmaceutical, the chemical and physical properties of the
ancillary ligand, the rate of formation, the yield, and the number
of isomeric forms of the resulting radiopharmaceuticals, the
ability to administer said ancillary or co-ligand to a patient
without adverse physiological consequences to said patient, and the
compatibility of the ligand in a lyophilized kit formulation. The
charge and lipophilicity of the ancillary ligand will effect the
charge and lipophilicity of the radiopharmaceuticals. For example,
the use of 4,5-dihydroxy-1,3-benzene disulfonate results in
radiopharmaceuticals with an additional two anionic groups because
the sulfonate groups will be anionic under physiological
conditions. The use of N-alkyl substituted 3,4-hydroxypyridinones
results in radiopharmaceuticals with varying degrees of
lipophilicity depending on the size of the alkyl substituents.
[0694] Preferred technetium radiopharmaceuticals of the present
invention are comprised of a hydrazido or diazenido bonding unit
and an ancillary ligand, A.sub.L1, or a bonding unit and two types
of ancillary A.sub.L1 and A.sub.L2, or a tetradentate chelator
comprised of two nitrogen and two sulfur atoms. Ancillary ligands
A.sub.L1 are comprised of two or more hard donor atoms such as
oxygen and amine nitrogen (sp.sup.3 hybridized). The donor atoms
occupy at least two of the sites in the coordination sphere of the
radionuclide metal; the ancillary ligand A.sub.L1 serves as one of
the three ligands in the ternary ligand system. Examples of
ancillary ligands A.sub.L1 include but are not limited to dioxygen
ligands and functionalized aminocarboxylates. A large number of
such ligands are available from commercial sources.
[0695] Ancillary dioxygen ligands include ligands that coordinate
to the metal ion through at least two oxygen donor atoms. Examples
include but are not limited to: glucoheptonate, gluconate,
2-hydroxyisobutyrate, lactate, tartrate, mannitol, glucarate,
maltol, Kojic acid, 2,2-bis(hydroxymethyl)propionic acid,
4,5-dihydroxy-1,3-benzene disulfonate, or substituted or
unsubstituted 1, 2 or 3,4 hydroxypyridinones. (The names for the
ligands in these examples refer to either the protonated or
non-protonated forms of the ligands.)
[0696] Functionalized aminocarboxylates include ligands that have a
combination of amine nitrogen and oxygen donor atoms. Examples
include but are not limited to: iminodiacetic acid,
2,3-diaminopropionic acid, nitrilotriacetic acid,
N,N'-ethylenediamine diacetic acid, N,N,N'-ethylenediamine
triacetic acid, hydroxyethylethylenediamine triacetic acid, and
N,N'-ethylenediamine bis-hydroxyphenylglycine. (The names for the
ligands in these examples refer to either the protonated or
non-protonated forms of the ligands.)
[0697] A series of functionalized aminocarboxylates are disclosed
by Bridger et. al. in U.S. Pat. No. 5,350,837, herein incorporated
by reference, that result in improved rates of formation of
technetium labeled hydrazino modified proteins. We have determined
that certain of these aminocarboxylates result in improved yields
of the radiopharmaceuticals of the present invention. The preferred
ancillary ligands A.sub.L1 functionalized aminocarboxylates that
are derivatives of glycine; the most preferred is tricine
(tris(hydroxymethyl)methylglycine)- .
[0698] The most preferred technetium radiopharmaceuticals of the
present invention are comprised of a hydrazido or diazenido bonding
unit and two types of ancillary designated A.sub.L1 and A.sub.L2,
or a diaminedithiol chelator. The second type of ancillary ligands
A.sub.L2 are comprised of one or more soft donor atoms selected
from the group: phosphine phosphorus, arsine arsenic, imine
nitrogen (sp.sup.2 hybridized), sulfur (sp.sup.2 hybridized) and
carbon (sp hybridized); atoms which have p-acid character. Ligands
A.sub.L2 can be monodentate, bidentate or tridentate, the denticity
is defined by the number of donor atoms in the ligand. One of the
two donor atoms in a bidentate ligand and one of the three donor
atoms in a tridentate ligand must be a soft donor atom. We have
disclosed in co-pending U.S. Ser. No. 08/415,908, and U.S. Ser. No.
60/013,360 and 08/646,886, the disclosures of which are herein
incorporated by reference in their entirety, that
radiopharmaceuticals comprised of one or more ancillary or
co-ligands A.sub.L2 are more stable compared to
radiopharmaceuticals that are not comprised of one or more
ancillary ligands, A.sub.L2; that is, they have a minimal number of
isomeric forms, the relative ratios of which do not change
significantly with time, and that remain substantially intact upon
dilution.
[0699] The ligands A.sub.L2 that are comprised of phosphine or
arsine donor atoms are trisubstituted phosphines, trisubstituted
arsines, tetrasubstituted diphosphines and tetrasubstituted
diarsines. The ligands A.sub.L2 that are comprised of imine
nitrogen are unsaturated or aromatic nitrogen-containing, 5 or
6-membered heterocycles. The ligands that are comprised of sulfur
(sp.sup.2 hybridized) donor atoms are thiocarbonyls, comprised of
the moiety C.dbd.S. The ligands comprised of carbon (sp hybridized)
donor atoms are isonitriles, comprised of the moiety CNR, where R
is an organic radical. A large number of such ligands are available
from commercial sources. Isonitriles can be synthesized as
described in European Patent 0107734 and in U.S. Pat. No.
4,988,827, herein incorporated by reference.
[0700] Preferred ancillary ligands A.sub.L2 are trisubstituted
phosphines and unsaturated or aromatic 5 or 6 membered
heterocycles. The most preferred ancillary ligands A.sub.L2 are
trisubstituted phosphines and unsaturated 5 membered
heterocycles.
[0701] The ancillary ligands A.sub.L2 may be substituted with
alkyl, aryl, alkoxy, heterocycle, aralkyl, alkaryl and arylalkaryl
groups and may or may not bear functional groups comprised of
heteroatoms such as oxygen, nitrogen, phosphorus or sulfur.
Examples of such functional groups include but are not limited to:
hydroxyl, carboxyl, carboxamide, nitro, ether, ketone, amino,
ammonium, sulfonate, sulfonamide, phosphonate, and phosphonamide.
The functional groups may be chosen to alter the lipophilicity and
water solubility of the ligands which may affect the biological
properties of the radiopharmaceuticals, such as altering the
distribution into non-target tissues, cells or fluids, and the
mechanism and rate of elimination from the body.
[0702] Chelators for magnetic resonance imaging contrast agents are
selected to form stable complexes with paramagnetic metal ions,
such as Gd(III), Dy(III), Fe(III), and Mn(II), are selected from
cyclic and acyclic polyaminocarboxylates such as DTPA, DOTA, DO3A,
2-benzyl-DOTA,
alpha-(2-phenethyl)1,4,7,10-tetraazacyclododecane-1-acetic-4,7,10-tris(me-
thylacetic)acid, 2-benzyl-cyclohexyldiethylenetriaminepentaacetic
acid, 2-benzyl-6-methyl-DTPA, and
6,6"-bis[N,N,N",N"-tetra(carboxymethyl)aminom-
ethyl)-4'-(3-amino-4-methoxyphenyl)-2,2':6',2"-terpyridine.
[0703] The technetium radiopharmaceuticals of the present invention
comprised of a hydrazido or diazenido bonding unit can be easily
prepared by admixing a salt of a radionuclide, a reagent of the
present invention, an ancillary ligand A.sub.L1, an ancillary
ligand A.sub.L2, and a reducing agent, in an aqueous solution at
temperatures from 0 to 100.degree. C. The technetium
radiopharmaceuticals of the present invention comprised of a
tetradentate chelator having two nitrogen and two sulfur atoms can
be easily prepared by admixing a salt of a radionuclide, a reagent
of the present invention, and a reducing agent, in an aqueous
solution at temperatures from 0 to 100.degree. C.
[0704] When the bonding unit in the reagent of the present
invention is present as a hydrazone group, then it must first be
converted to a hydrazine, which may or may not be protonated, prior
to complexation with the metal radionuclide. The conversion of the
hydrazone group to the hydrazine can occur either prior to reaction
with the radionuclide, in which case the radionuclide and the
ancillary or co-ligand or ligands are combined not with the reagent
but with a hydrolyzed form of the reagent bearing the chelator or
bonding unit, or in the presence of the radionuclide in which case
the reagent itself is combined with the radionuclide and the
ancillary or co-ligand or ligands. In the latter case, the pH of
the reaction mixture must be neutral or acidic.
[0705] Alternatively, the radiopharmaceuticals of the present
invention comprised of a hydrazido or diazenido bonding unit can be
prepared by first admixing a salt of a radionuclide, an ancillary
ligand A.sub.L1, and a reducing agent in an aqueous solution at
temperatures from 0 to 100.degree. C. to form an intermediate
radionuclide complex with the ancillary ligand A.sub.L1 then adding
a reagent of the present invention and an ancillary ligand A.sub.L2
and reacting further at temperatures from 0 to 100.degree. C.
[0706] Alternatively, the radiopharmaceuticals of the present
invention comprised of a hydrazido or diazenido bonding unit can be
prepared by first admixing a salt of a radionuclide, an ancillary
ligand A.sub.L1, a reagent of the present invention, and a reducing
agent in an aqueous solution at temperatures from 0 to 100.degree.
C. to form an intermediate radionuclide complex, and then adding an
ancillary ligand A.sub.L2 and reacting further at temperatures from
0 to 100.degree. C.
[0707] The technetium radionuclide is preferably in the chemical
form of pertechnetate or perrhenate and a pharmaceutically
acceptable cation. The pertechnetate salt form is preferably sodium
pertechnetate such as obtained from commercial Tc-99m generators.
The amount of pertechnetate used to prepare the
radiopharmaceuticals of the present invention can range from 0.1
mCi to 1 Ci, or more preferably from 1 to 200 mCi.
[0708] The amount of the reagent of the present invention used to
prepare the technetium radiopharmaceutical of the present invention
can range from 0.01 .mu.g to 10 mg, or more preferably from 0.5
.mu.g to 200 .mu.g. The amount used will be dictated by the amounts
of the other reactants and the identity of the radiopharmaceuticals
of the present invention to be prepared.
[0709] The amounts of the ancillary ligands A.sub.L1 used can range
from 0.1 mg to 1 g, or more preferably from 1 mg to 100 mg. The
exact amount for a particular radiopharmaceutical is a function of
identity of the radiopharmaceuticals of the present invention to be
prepared, the procedure used and the amounts and identities of the
other reactants. Too large an amount of A.sub.L1 will result in the
formation of by-products comprised of technetium labeled A.sub.L1
without a biologically active molecule or by-products comprised of
technetium labeled biologically active molecules with the ancillary
ligand A.sub.L1 but without the ancillary ligand A.sub.L2. Too
small an amount of A.sub.L1 will result in other by-products such
as technetium labeled biologically active molecules with the
ancillary ligand A.sub.L2 but without the ancillary ligand
A.sub.L1, or reduced hydrolyzed technetium, or technetium
colloid.
[0710] The amounts of the ancillary ligands A.sub.L2 used can range
from 0.001 mg to 1 g, or more preferably from 0.01 mg to 10 mg. The
exact amount for a particular radiopharmaceutical is a function of
the identity of the radiopharmaceuticals of the present invention
to be prepared, the procedure used and the amounts and identities
of the other reactants. Too large an amount of A.sub.L2 will result
in the formation of by-products comprised of technetium labeled
A.sub.L2 without a biologically active molecule or by-products
comprised of technetium labeled biologically active molecules with
the ancillary ligand A.sub.L2 but without the ancillary ligand
A.sub.L1. If the reagent bears one or more substituents that are
comprised of a soft donor atom, as defined above, at least a
ten-fold molar excess of the ancillary ligand A.sub.L2 to the
reagent of formula 2 is required to prevent the substituent from
interfering with the coordination of the ancillary ligand A.sub.L2
to the metal radionuclide.
[0711] Suitable reducing agents for the synthesis of the
radiopharmaceuticals of the present invention include stannous
salts, dithionite or bisulfite salts, borohydride salts, and
formamidinesulfinic acid, wherein the salts are of any
pharmaceutically acceptable form. The preferred reducing agent is a
stannous salt. The amount of a reducing agent used can range from
0.001 mg to 10 mg, or more preferably from 0.005 mg to 1 mg.
[0712] The specific structure of a radiopharmaceutical of the
present invention comprised of a hydrazido or diazenido bonding
unit will depend on the identity of the reagent of the present
invention used, the identity of any ancillary ligand A.sub.L1, the
identity of any ancillary ligand A.sub.L2, and the identity of the
radionuclide. Radiopharmaceuticals comprised of a hydrazido or
diazenido bonding unit synthesized using concentrations of reagents
of <100 .mu.g/mL, will be comprised of one hydrazido or
diazenido group. Those synthesized using >1 mg/mL concentrations
will be comprised of two hydrazido or diazenido groups from two
reagent molecules. For most applications, only a limited amount of
the biologically active molecule can be injected and not result in
undesired side-effects, such as chemical toxicity, interference
with a biological process or an altered biodistribution of the
radiopharmaceutical. Therefore, the radiopharmaceuticals which
require higher concentrations of the reagents comprised in part of
the biologically active molecule, will have to be diluted or
purified after synthesis to avoid such side-effects.
[0713] The identities and amounts used of the ancillary ligands
A.sub.L1 and A.sub.L2 will determine the values of the variables y
and z. The values of y and z can independently be an integer from 1
to 2. In combination, the values of y and z will result in a
technetium coordination sphere that is made up of at least five and
no more than seven donor atoms. For monodentate ancillary ligands
A.sub.L2, z can be an integer from 1 to 2; for bidentate or
tridentate ancillary ligands A.sub.L2, z is 1. The preferred
combination for monodentate ligands is y equal to 1 or 2 and z
equal to 1. The preferred combination for bidentate or tridentate
ligands is y equal to 1 and z equal to 1.
[0714] The indium, copper, and gallium radiopharmaceuticals of the
present invention can be easily prepared by admixing a salt of a
radionuclide and a reagent of the present invention, in an aqueous
solution at temperatures from 0 to 100.degree. C. These
radionuclides are typically obtained as a dilute aqueous solution
in a mineral acid, such as hydrochloric, nitric or sulfuric acid.
The radionuclides are combined with from one to about one thousand
equivalents of the reagents of the present invention dissolved in
aqueous solution. A buffer is typically used to maintain the pH of
the reaction mixture between 3 and 10.
[0715] The gadolinium, dysprosium, iron and manganese
metallopharmaceuticals of the present invention can be easily
prepared by admixing a salt of the paramagnetic metal ion and a
reagent of the present invention, in an aqueous solution at
temperatures from 0 to 100.degree. C. These paramagnetic metal ions
are typically obtained as a dilute aqueous solution in a mineral
acid, such as hydrochloric, nitric or sulfuric acid. The
paramagnetic metal ions are combined with from one to about one
thousand equivalents of the reagents of the present invention
dissolved in aqueous solution. A buffer is typically used to
maintain the pH of the reaction mixture between 3 and 10.
[0716] The total time of preparation will vary depending on the
identity of the metal ion, the identities and amounts of the
reactants and the procedure used for the preparation. The
preparations may be complete, resulting in >80% yield of the
radiopharmaceutical, in 1 minute or may require more time. If
higher purity metallopharmaceuticals are needed or desired, the
products can be purified by any of a number of techniques well
known to those skilled in the art such as liquid chromatography,
solid phase extraction, solvent extraction, dialysis or
ultrafiltration.
[0717] Buffers useful in the preparation of metallopharmaceuticals
and in diagnostic kits useful for the preparation of said
radiopharmaceuticals include but are not limited to phosphate,
citrate, sulfosalicylate, and acetate. A more complete list can be
found in the United States Pharmacopeia.
[0718] Lyophilization aids useful in the preparation of diagnostic
kits useful for the preparation of radiopharmaceuticals include but
are not limited to mannitol, lactose, sorbitol, dextran, Ficoll,
and polyvinylpyrrolidine(PVP).
[0719] Stabilization aids useful in the preparation of
metallopharmaceuticals and in diagnostic kits useful for the
preparation of radiopharmaceuticals include but are not limited to
ascorbic acid, cysteine, monothioglycerol, sodium bisulfite, sodium
metabisulfite, gentisic acid, and inositol.
[0720] Solubilization aids useful in the preparation of
metallopharmaceuticals and in diagnostic kits useful for the
preparation of radiopharmaceuticals include but are not limited to
ethanol, glycerin, polyethylene glycol, propylene glycol,
polyoxyethylene sorbitan monooleate, sorbitan monoloeate,
polysorbates, poly(oxyethylene)poly(oxyp-
ropylene)poly(oxyethylene) block copolymers (Pluronics) and
lecithin. Preferred solubilizing aids are polyethylene glycol, and
Pluronics.
[0721] Bacteriostats useful in the preparation of
metallopharmaceuticals and in diagnostic kits useful for the
preparation of radiopharmaceuticals include but are not limited to
benzyl alcohol, benzalkonium chloride, chlorbutanol, and methyl,
propyl or butyl paraben.
[0722] A component in a diagnostic kit can also serve more than one
function. A reducing agent can also serve as a stabilization aid, a
buffer can also serve as a transfer ligand, a lyophilization aid
can also serve as a transfer, ancillary or co-ligand and so
forth.
[0723] The diagnostic radiopharmaceuticals are administered by
intravenous injection, usually in saline solution, at a dose of 1
to 100 mCi per 70 kg body weight, or preferably at a dose of 5 to
50 mCi. Imaging is performed using known procedures.
[0724] The magnetic resonance imaging contrast agents of the
present invention may be used in a similar manner as other MRI
agents as described in U.S. Pat. No. 5,155,215; U.S. Pat. No.
5,087,440; Margerstadt et al., Magn. Reson. Med., 1986, 3, 808;
Runge et al., Radiology, 1988, 166, 835; and Bousquet et al.,
Radiology, 1988, 166, 693. Generally, sterile aqueous solutions of
the contrast agents are administered to a patient intravenously in
dosages ranging from 0.01 to 1.0 mmoles per kg body weight.
[0725] For use as X-ray contrast agents, the compositions of the
present invention should generally have a heavy atom concentration
of 1 mM to 5 M, preferably 0.1 M to 2 M. Dosages, administered by
intravenous injection, will typically range from 0.5 mmol/kg to 1.5
mmol/kg, preferably 0.8 mmol/kg to 1.2 mmol/kg. Imaging is
performed using known techniques, preferably X-ray computed
tomography.
[0726] The ultrasound contrast agents of the present invention are
administered by intravenous injection in an amount of 10 to 30
.mu.L of the echogenic gas per kg body weight or by infusion at a
rate of approximately 3 .mu.L/kg/min. Imaging is performed using
known techniques of sonography.
[0727] Other features of the invention will become apparent in the
course of the following descriptions of exemplary embodiments which
are given for illustration of the invention and are not intended to
be limiting thereof.
Synthesis
[0728] The compounds of the present invention can be prepared in a
number of ways well known to one skilled in the art of organic
synthesis. The compounds of the present invention can be
synthesized using the methods described below, together with
synthetic methods known in the art of synthetic organic chemistry,
or variations thereon as appreciated by those skilled in the art.
Preferred methods include, but are not limited to, those described
below. All references cited herein are hereby incorporated in their
entirety herein by reference.
[0729] The novel compounds of this invention may be prepared using
the reactions and techniques described in this section. The
reactions are performed in solvents appropriate to the reagents and
materials employed and are suitable for the transformations being
effected. Also, in the description of the synthetic methods
described below, it is to be understood that all proposed reaction
conditions, including choice of solvent, reaction atmosphere,
reaction temperature, duration of the experiment and workup
procedures, are chosen to be the conditions standard for that
reaction, which should be readily recognized by one skilled in the
art. It is understood by one skilled in the art of organic
synthesis that the functionality present on various portions of the
molecule must be compatible with the reagents and reactions
proposed. Such restrictions to the substituents which are
compatible with the reaction conditions will be readily apparent to
one skilled in the art and alternate methods must then be used.
[0730] Methods for the synthesis of succinylamino lactams are known
in the art and are disclosed in a number of references including
PCT publication number WO 96/29313, which is hereby incorporated by
reference.
[0731] Disubstituted succinate derivatives can be prepared by a
number of known procedures. The procedure of Evans (D. A. Evans et
al, Org. Synth. 86, p83 (1990)) is outlined in Scheme 1 where
acylation of an oxazolidinone with an acylating agent such as an
acid chloride provides structures 1. Alkylation to form 2 followed
by cleavage of the chiral auxiliary and subsequent alkylation of
the dianion of the carboxylic acid 3 provides a variety of
disubstituted succinates which can be separated and incorporated
into structures of Formula (I) by those skilled in the art.
Additional examples are found in P. Becket, M. J. Crimmin, M. H.
Davis, Z. Spavold, Synlett, (1993), 137-138, incorporated herein by
reference. 27
[0732] Diastereomerically pure succinate derivatives can be
accessed using the chemistry outlined below, adapted from P.
Becket, M. J. Crimmin, M. H. Davis, Z. Spavold, Synlett, (1993),
137-138 incorporated herein by reference. This reference provides
the synthesis below to obtain compound 9. Compound 11 is used as an
intermediate and is prepared from 9 by hydrogenation of the allyl
group followed by coupling of 9-fluorenemethanol under standard
conditions using DCC and DMAP in CH.sub.2Cl.sub.2. Deprotection of
the tert-butyl ester is accomplished by treatment with 50%
trifluoroacetic acid.
[0733] Additional methods useful for the preparation of succinate
derivatives are known by those skilled in the art. Such references
include, McClure and Axt, Bioorganic & Medicinal Chemistry
Letters, 8 (1998) 143-146; Jacobson and Reddy, Tetrahedron Letters,
Vol 37, No. 46, 8263-8266 (1996); Pratt et al., SYNLETT, May 1998,
p. 531. 2829
[0734] A variety of compounds of Formula (I) can be prepared by
methods described in Scheme 4. The protected .alpha.-amine 3 of the
.alpha.-amino-.epsilon.-caprolactam can be prepared by methods well
known in the literature for amino protecting groups as discussed in
Theodora W. Greene's book "Protective Groups in Organic Synthesis",
such as N-Boc using di-t-butyldicarbonate in an appropriate solvent
like DMSO. A sulfur atom can be introduced into the ring providing
L-.alpha.-amino-.beta.-thi- o-.epsilon.-caprolactam according to
the procedure in S. A. Ahmed et al, FEBS Letters, (1984), vol. 174,
pages 76-9 (Scheme 3). One skilled in the art can extend this
methodology to the synthesis of .beta.-amino and oxygen containing
rings by analogy. The sulfur-containing molecules can also be
oxidized to the sulfoxide and sulfone by methods known to one
skilled in the art. 30
[0735] The lactam nitrogen of compound 13 can be alkylated by
generating the anion with bases such as LDA, lithium
bis(trimethylsilyl)amide or sodium hydride in solvents like THF,
with or without cosolvents such as DMPU or HMPA and reacting this
with a variety of groups containing leaving groups (X") like
bromide, iodide, mesylate or tosylate. Alkylating agents such as
.alpha.-bromo amides, ketones and acids can be prepared by a number
of literature methods including halogenation of amino acids by
diazotization or are commercially available. Other suitable
alkylating agents such as alkyl, allylic and benzylic halides can
be formed form a variety of precursors such as free-radical
addition of halides or activation of alcohols, and other
chemistries known to those skilled in the art. For discussion of
these types of reactions, see Carey, F. A. and Sundberg, R. J.,
Advanced Organic Chemistry, Part A, New York: Plenum Press, 1990,
pages 304-305, 342-347, 695-698.
[0736] The N-Boc protecting group can be removed by any number of
methods well known in the literature like TFA in methylene chloride
to give the compound 15. The amine 15 can be coupled to an
appropriately substituted carboxylic acid or acid chloride by
methods well described in the literature for making amide bonds,
like TBTU in DMF with a base like NMM to give the elaborated
compound 16. Compounds 16 can be alkylated using standard bases
like LDA, NaH, or NaHMDS to deprotonate the amide followed by
addition of an alkylating agent with an appropriate leaving group
like halide, mesylate, or triflate in an appropriate solvent to
provide compounds 17 with an R.sup.6 substituent.
[0737] The t-butyl ester is then removed by treatment with TFA in
methylene chloride to give the carboxylic acid 17. 31
[0738] The final compounds 18 were prepared by treating the
activated carboxylic acid of 17 with an appropriately substituted
amine. For instance, activation of the carboxylic acid with HATU
(O-(7-azabenzotriazol-1-yl)-1,1,3,3,-tetramethyluronium
hexafluorophosphate) or PyBOP
(benzotriazole-1-yl-oxy-tris-pyrrolidino-ph- osphonium
hexafluorophosphate) or other coupling agents known to those
skilled in the art allows condensation with ammonia to form primary
amides. Similarly, condensation of the activated acid with
hydroxylamine hydrochloride provides the hydroxamic acid, or
reaction with a primary or secondary amine provides the substituted
amine derivative. Activation of the acid with PyBrOP
(bromo-tris-pyrrolidino-phosphonium hexafluorophosphate) followed
by addition of an alcohol and 4-dimethylaminopyridine allows
formation of the ester directly. For additional acylation reactions
see for example Carey, F. A. and Sundberg, R. J., Advanced Organic
Chemistry, Part A, New York: Plenum Press, 1990, pages 475-479.
[0739] Additional Examples of compounds of Formula (I) can be
prepared as shown in Scheme 5. A suitable resin for solid phase
synthesis such as Fmoc (Fluorenylmethylcarbonyl)-protected
hydroxylamine bound to polystyrene beads can be purchased from
Novabiochem, Inc. Deprotection of the Fmoc group under standard
conditions using 20% piperidine in DMF provides trityl-linked
hydroxylamine resin. Coupling of a fluorenylmethyl-protected
succinic acid derivative such as 20 with a coupling agent such as
HATU in a suitable solvent like DMF or N-methylpyrrolidinone
provides the support-bound hydroxamate 21. The Fluorenylmethyl
ester can be removed using 20% piperidine in DMF to provide the
free carboxylic acid which can be coupled to amines like the
caprolactam 22 (which is available using chemistry outlined in
Scheme 4) using PyBOP
(benzotriazole-1-yl-oxy-tris-pyrrolidino-phosphonium
hexafluorophosphate) and a suitable base like DIEA in DMF or NMP.
The support-bound intermediate 23 can then be elaborated to biaryl
structures of the type 24 using typical Suzuki coupling conditions
employing a catalyst such as Palladium complexes like
tetrakis(triphenylphosphine)-pa- lladium with 2M aqueous sodium
carbonate as a base in a suitable solvent like THF or DME and an
excess of a boronic acid. The final compounds are liberated from
the support employing dilute (5%) trifluoroacetic acid in
CH.sub.2CL.sub.2 and purified by conventional chromatography.
32
[0740] General Procedure for Solid-Phase Synthesis According to
Scheme 5.
[0741] Resin 20 of Scheme 5: Fmoc-protected resin 19 (2.0 g, 0.78
mmol/g, 1.56 mmol) is purchased from Novabiochem and swelled in 20
ml of CH.sub.2Cl.sub.2 for 1 hour. The CH.sub.2Cl.sub.2 is removed
and the resin is then treated with 25% v/v piperidine in DMF (8 mL)
and allowed to shake slowly for 16 h. The solvent was removed by
filtration and the resin was shaken with an additional 8 mL of 25%
v/v piperidine in DMF for 2 h at rt. The solvents were removed by
filtration, and the resin 20 was rinsed 3.times. with 20 mL of DMF,
3.times. with 20 mL of methanol, and 3.times. with 20 mL of
CH.sub.2Cl.sub.2 and dried in vacuo.
[0742] Succinate 10 of Scheme 2: Succinate 9 is prepared according
to the literature procedure (P. Becket, M. J. Crimmin, M. H. Davis,
Z. Spavold, Synlett, (1993), 137-138). Succinate 9 (17.8 g, 66
mmol) is dissolved in 250 mL of ethyl acetate and placed in a Parr
shaker bottle. To the solution is added 890 mg of 5% palladium on
carbon, and the bottle is pressurized to 40 psi with hydrogen gas
and shaken for 2.5 h at rt. The hydrogen is removed and the
palladium catalyst is removed by filtration through a pad of
celite. Concentration of the ethyl acetate solution provides 17.5 g
(98%) of succinate 10. No further purification is necessary. MS
(M-H).sup.+=271.
[0743] Succinate 21 of Scheme 5: Succinate 10 (6.3 g, 23.1 mmol) is
dissolved in 125 mL of CH.sub.2Cl.sub.2 and 4.8 g (23.3 mmol) of
dicyclohexylcarbodiimide is added. The solution is stirred at rt
for 30 min and then 4.6 g (23.4 mmol) of 9-fluorenemethanol is
added followed by 122 mg (1 mmol) of 4-dimethylaminopyridine. After
5 h of stirring at rt, the reaction solution was diluted with an
additional 100 mL of CH.sub.2Cl.sub.2 and filtered through a pad of
celite to remove precipitated dicyclohexylurea. The solution was
then washed 3.times. with 50 mL of a 1N HCl solution, 3.times. with
50 mL of a saturated sodium bicarbonate solution, and 2.times. with
50 mL of brine. The crude product was dried over MgSO.sub.4 and
soncentrated onto 15 g of silica gel. Chromatography eluting with a
gradient of 2.5% to 5% ethyl acetate/hexanes provided 6.4 g (61%)
of the diester as an oil. The purified diester (6.4 g 14.2 mmol) is
then dissolved in 25 mL of CH.sub.2Cl.sub.2, 25 mL of
trifluoroacetic acid is added, and the reaction solution is stirred
at rt for 2 h. The reaction solution is directly concentrated in
vacuo to an oil which is then redissolved in 25 mL of toluene and
reconcentrated, followed by drying in vacuo to provide 6.3 g (98%)
of the desired succinate 9 as an oil which solidifies on standing.
MS (M+Na).sup.+=471, (M+2Na).sup.+=439.
[0744] Caprolactam 23 of Scheme 5: Boc-caprolactam 14 (5.0 g, 21.9
mmol) is dissolved in 60 mL of THF and chilled to -78.degree. C. To
the chilled solution is added 24 mL of a 1.0 M solution of lithium
bis(trimethylsilyl)amide in THF, and the solution was brounght to
0.degree. C. and stirred for 15 min. To the anion solution was
added 6.5 g (22 mmol) of 3-iodobenzyl bromide (Aldrich) and the the
solution was allowed to warm to rt and stirred for 18 h. The
reaction solution was diluted with 50 mL of water and extracted
3.times. with ethyl acetate. The combined organic layers were dried
over MgSO.sub.4 and concentrated in vacuo. The crude product was
purified by chromatography eluting with a gradient of 5-20% ethyl
acetate/hexanes to afford 7.0 g (72%) of the title compound as a
white solid. MS (M+Na).sup.+=467.
[0745] Resin 22 of Scheme 5: Resin 22 (2.0 g, 0.78 mmol/g, 1.56
mmol) was swollen in 3 mL of DMF. In a separate flask, 1.85 g (4.68
mmol) of succinate 21 was dissolved in 3 mL of DMF and 2.5 mL of
N,N-diisopropylethylamine (14 mmol) wsa added, followed by 1.81 g
(4.68 mmol) of HATU. The solution containing the active ester was
added to the slurried resin and the reaction suspension was slowly
shaken for 18 h. The resin was then washed 3.times. with 20 mL of
DMF, 3.times. with 20 mL of methanol, and 3.times. with 20 mL of
CH.sub.2Cl.sub.2. Loading of the resin was determined by Fmoc
quantitation to be 0.25 mmol/g, see Reddy, M. P.; Voelker, P. J.
Int. J. Pept. Protein Res. 1998, 31, 345-348.
[0746] Resin 24 of Scheme 5: Resin 22 (2.0 g, 0.25 mmol/g, 0.5
mmol) was suspended in 10 mL of 25% piperidine in DMF. The
suspended resin was shaken for 30 min at rt, and then the resin was
washed 3.times. with 20 mL of DMF, 3.times. with 20 mL of methanol,
and 3.times. with 20 mL of CH.sub.2Cl.sub.2. Deprotected resin (1.0
g, 0.25 mmol) was swollen in 2 mL of DMF. To the slurry was added
650 mg (1.25 mmol) of PyBOP and 217 mL (1.25 mmol) of DIEA.
Separately, 443 mg (0.97 mmol) of caprolactam 23 was dissolved in 2
mL of DMF and 436 mL (2.5 mmol) of DIEA was added. The caprolactam
solution was added to the resin slurry and the resin was mixed for
18 h at rt. The solvents were then removed and the coupling was
repeated, with shaking at rt for 6 h. The resin was then washed
3.times. with 10 mL of DMF, 3.times. with 10 mL of methanol, and
3.times. with 10 mL of CH.sub.2Cl.sub.2.
[0747] Products 25 of Scheme 5: A 70 mg (17.5 mmol) portion of
resin 24 was suspended in 1 mL of THF in a screw-cap vial. To the
slurry was added a boronic acid (0.15 mmol), 150 mL of a 2 M
solution of sodium carbonate, and 15 mg (13 mmol) of
tetrakis(triphenylphosphine)palladium. The vial was tightly closed
and heated to 60.degree. C. for 16 h using a dry heater on a shaker
table. The solvents were then removed by filtration and the resin
was washed 3.times. with THF (2 mL), 3.times. with methanol (2 mL),
3.times. with water, and 3.times. with CH.sub.2Cl.sub.2. The resins
were then placed in a glass vial and cleaved with 1 mL of 5%
trifluoroacetic acid in CH.sub.2Cl.sub.2 for 30 min. The solution
ws filtered off and the resin was washed with an additional 2 mL of
CH.sub.2Cl.sub.2 and the combined filtrates were evaporated to
dryness to yield the crude products 25. The products were purified
by chromatography eluting with 10-100% ethyl acetate in hexanes to
yield 13.0 to 6.0 mg (14-60%) of the final products.
[0748] Additional Examples of compounds of Formula (I) can be
prepared as shown in Scheme 6. A suitable resin for solid phase
synthesis such as Fmoc (Fluorenylmethylcarbonyl)-protected peptide
amide linker (PAL)-derivatized polystyrene beads can be purchased
from Perkin Elmer Biosystems, Inc. Deprotection of the Fmoc group
under standard conditions using 20% piperidine in DMF provides the
free benzylamine. Coupling of a succinic acid derivative such as 28
(which is available using chemistry outlined in Scheme 4) with a
coupling agent such as HATU in a suitable solvent like DMF or
N-methylpyrrolidinone provides the support-bound amide 29. The
support-bound intermediate 29 can then be elaborated to biaryl
structures of the type 24 using typical Suzuki coupling conditions
employing a catalyst such as Palladium complexes like
tetrakis(triphenylphosphine)-palladium with 2M aqueous sodium
carbonate as a base in a suitable solvent like THF or DME and an
excess of a boronic acid. The final compounds are liberated from
the support employing 50% trifluoroacetic acid in CH.sub.2Cl.sub.2
and can be purified by conventional chromatography or preparative
HPLC. 33
[0749] General Procedure for Solid-Phase Synthesis According to
Scheme 6
[0750] Resin 27 of Scheme 6: Fmoc-protected PAL resin 26 (0.80 g,
0.50 mmol/g, 0.40 mmol) is purchased from Advanced Chemtech and
swelled in 20 ml of CH.sub.2Cl.sub.2 for 1 hour. The
CH.sub.2Cl.sub.2 is removed and the resin is then treated with 25%
v/v piperidine in DMF (6 mL) and allowed to shake slowly for 1 h.
The solvents were removed by filtration, and the resin 27 was
rinsed 3.times. with 20 mL of DMF, 3.times. with 20 mL of methanol,
and 3.times. with 20 mL of CH.sub.2Cl.sub.2. and dried in
vacuo.
[0751] Acid 28 of Scheme 6: To a solution of 0.100 g (367 mmol) of
succinate 10 dissolved in 2.0 mL of dry DMF was added 0.120 mL
(1.10 mmol) of N-methylmorpholine. A second solution containing
0.139 g (0.403 mmol) of caprolactam 23 of Scheme 5 dissolved in 2.0
mL of DMF was then added. To the mixed solution was added 229 mg
(0.440 mmol) of PyBop and the reaction solution was stirred for 16
h at rt. The reaction solution was diluted with water (20 mL) and
extracted 3.times. with 100 mL of ethyl acetate. The combined
organic layers were dried with Na.sub.2SO.sub.4 and concentrated
under reduced pressure. The resulting oil was purified by
chromatography eluting with a gradient of 5-20% ethyl acetate in
hexanes to provide 0.195 g (0.360 mmol, 98%) of the tert-butyl
ester of Acid 28 (MS M+Na=621). The purified ester (0.195 g, 0.360
mmol) was dissolved in 10 mL of 25% trifluoroacetic acid in
CH.sub.2Cl.sub.2 and stirred for 2 h at rt. The solvents were
removed under reduced pressure and the acid was redissolved in 5 mL
of toluene and reconcentrated 2.times. to remove residual TFA. The
crude acid was found to be pure by .sup.1H NMR and was used in
Scheme 6 without further purification.
[0752] Resin 29 of Scheme 6. Resin 27 (800 mg, 0.40 mmol) was
solvated in 4.0 mL of dry DMF and and 0.63 mL (3.6 mmol) of
diisopropylethylamine was added followed by a solution of Acid 28
dissolved in 4 mL of DMF. To the slurry was then added 0.465 g (1.2
mmol) of HATU and the slurry was shaken for 26 h at rt. The
solvents were removed by filtration, and the resin 29 was rinsed
3.times. with 20 mL of DMF, 3.times. with 20 mL of methanol, and
3.times. with 20 mL of CH.sub.2Cl.sub.2. and dried in vacuo.
[0753] Products 30 of Scheme 6: A 75 mg (0.38 mmol/g, 28.8 .mu.mol)
portion of resin 24 was suspended in 1 mL of THF in a screw-cap
vial. To the slurry was added a boronic acid (0.33 mmol), 150 mL of
a 2 M solution of sodium carbonate, and 15 mg (13 mmol) of
tetrakis(triphenylphosphine)p- alladium. The vial was tightly
closed and heated to 60.degree. C. for 16 h using a dry heater on a
shaker table. The solvents were then removed by filtration and the
resin was washed 3.times. with THF (2 mL), 3.times. with methanol
(2 mL), 3.times. with water, and 3.times. with CH.sub.2Cl.sub.2.
The resins were then placed in a glass vial and cleaved with 1 mL
of 5% trifluoroacetic acid in CH.sub.2Cl.sub.2 for 2 h. The
solution was filtered off and the resin was washed with an
additional 2 mL of CH.sub.2Cl.sub.2 and the combined filtrates were
evaporated to dryness to yield the crude products 25. The products
were purified by chromatography eluting with 10-100% ethyl acetate
in hexanes to yield 0.5 to 2.0 mg (14-60%) of the final
products.
[0754] The internal phenyl ring can be exchanged for a pyridine
ring using chemistry outlined in Scheme 7. The chloromethyl pyidine
33 is prepared using a known procedure reported in Nutaitis,
Charles F.; Ledeboer, Mark W. Org. Prep. Proced. Int. (1992),
24(2), 143-6 Incorporated herein by reference. After freebasing the
pyridine, alkylation with the Boc-caprolactam provides pyridine
intermediate 34, which can be elaborated to the protected amide 35
with succinate 10. Substitution can then be introduced using Suzuki
methodology employing a palladium source such as
tetrakis(triphenylphosphine)palladium(0) or
bis(diphenylphosphinoferrocene)palladium(II) dichloride and a
suitable base such as sodium carbonate or triethylamine in a
solvent such as THF or toluene containing 10% methanol. Stille
chemistry is also possible using a suitable palladium source such
as tetrakis(triphenylphosphine)pal- ladium(0) and an aryl or vinyl
tin derivative in a solvent such as benzene, toluene, or xylenes.
The tert-butyl ester is then deprotected under standard acidic
conditions using trifluoroacetic acid and the amide is formed under
standard conditions to provide products 36. 34
[0755] General Procedure for Synthesis According to Scheme 7
[0756] The chloromethyl pyidine HCl salt 33 is prepared using a
known procedure reported in Nutaitis, Charles F.; Ledeboer, Mark W.
Org. Prep. Proced. Int. (1992), 24(2), 143-6.
[0757] Caprolactam 34: Pyridine HCl salt 33 (2.0 g, 8.3 mmol) is
dissolved in 50 mL of a saturated NaHCO.sub.3 solution and the
solution is extracted with 30 mL of CH.sub.2Cl.sub.2 3.times.
followed by concentration of the organic layers to provide the free
base. Separately, 1.8 g (7.8 mmol) of caprolactam 13 is dissolved
in 40 mL of dry THF and chilled to -78.degree. C. To the solution
was added 8.7 mL of a 1M solution of sodium
bis(trimethylsilyl)amide. The solution was brought to 0.degree. C.
and stirred for 30 min. To the resultant anion was added a solution
of 1.7 g (8.3 mmol) of pyridine 33 free base dissolved in 40 mL of
THF. The resulting reaction solution was stirred at rt for 18 h and
then heated to 50.degree. C. and stirred an additional 3 h. The
reaction solution was allowed to cool and then 50 mL of water was
added and the aqueous layer was extracted 2.times. with 100 mL of
ethyl acteate. The combined organic layers were dried and
concentrated under reduced pressure to provide the crude product
which was purified by chromatography eluting with 20 to 100% ethyl
acetate in hexanes to provide 1.5 g (51%) of caprolactam 34 as an
oil.
[0758] Amide 35: Caprolactam 34 (0.40 g, 1.0 mmol) is dissolved in
20 mL of 50% trifluoroacetic acid in CH.sub.2Cl.sub.2 and stirred
at rt for 30 min. The solvents were then removed under reduced
pressure and the resulting oil was redissolved in 5 mL of toluene
and reconcentrated to remove residual TFA. Separately, 0.270 g (1.0
mmol) of succinate 10 was dissolved in 5.0 mL of dry DMF and 0.44
mL (4 mmol) of N-methylmorpholine was added followed by 0.50 g (1.3
mmol) of HATU and the resulting solution was stirred at rt for 30
min. The crude deprotected caprolactam from above was dissolved in
5.0 mL of dry DMF and added to the succinate solution and the
resulting solution was heated to 50.degree. C. and stirred for 2
days. The solution was then diluted with 20 mL of water and
extracted with 3 50 mL portions of ethyl acetate. The combined
organic layers were dried and concentrated under reduced pressure
to provide an oil which was purified by chromatography eluting with
20 to 50% ethyl acetate in hexanes to provide 0.40 g (70%) of the
Amide 35.
[0759] The compounds of Formula (I) of the present invention can
also be prepared from aminolactam 42 and succinic acid derivatives
41 using amide bond syntheses known in the art, including methods
commonly used in peptide syntheses, such as HATU, TBTU, BOP, pyBOP,
EDC, CDI, DCC, hydroxysuccinimide, mixed carboxylic anhydride, and
phenyl ester mediated couplings, as illustrated in Scheme 9 for the
synthesis of aminolactam 43, an embodiment of the present
invention. 35
[0760] Depending on the structure of the final product, it is
appreciated by those skilled in the art that protecting groups or
precursor functionality convertable to the desired groups may be
desireable. Protecting groups and their use in synthesis are
described in Green and Wuts, Protective Groups in Organic
Synthesis, (Wiley 1991). The use of protecting groups is further
illustrated in Scheme 10, in which the succinate half-ester 44
(Becket et al., Synlett 1993, 137-138) is coupled to the
aminobenzodiazepine 45 (Sherrill and Sugg, J. Org. Chem. 1995, 60,
730-734; Bock et al., J. Med. Chem., 1993, 36, 4276-4292) to give
ester 46, followed by conversion of the ester group to the primary
amide 47. 36
[0761] Methods for the synthesis of lactams as contemplated by the
present invention in lactam ring B in Formula (I), including amino
benzodiazepines, are known in the art and are disclosed in a number
of references including PCT publication number WO 98/28268, which
is hereby incorporated by reference. Additional references include
Bock, et al, J. Org. Chem., 1987, 52, 3232-3239 and Sherrill et al,
J. Org. Chem., 1995, 60, 730-734; Walsh, D. A., Synthesis,
September 1980, p. 677.
EXAMPLES
[0762] Chemical abbreviations used in the Examples are defined as
follows: "DMPU" for
1,3-dimethyl-3,4,5,6-tetrahydro-2(1H)-pyrimidone, "TBTU" for
O-(1H-benzotriazol-1-yl)-N,N,N',N'-tetramethyluronium
tetrafluoroborate, and "BOP" for
benzotriazol-1-yloxytris-(dimethylamino)phosphonium
hexafluorophosphate. It is understood that one skilled in the art
can discern compounds used in the synthesis of Examples of the
invention may be referred to by structure and number. For example,
Resin 20 refers to the resin of structure 20 in Scheme 5; succinate
9 refers to the structure 9 found in Scheme 2 which is a succinate
compound.
[0763] "HPLC" is an abbreviation used herein for high pressure
liquid chromatography. Reverse-phase HPLC was carried out using a
Vydac C-18 column with gradient elution from 10% to 100% buffer B
in buffer A (buffer A: water containing 0.1% trifluoroacetic acid,
buffer B: 10% water, 90% acetonitrile containing 0.1%
trifluoroacetic acid).
Example 1
(2R,3S)
N1-[(3S)-hexahydro-1-(3,3-diphenylpropyl)-2-oxo-1H-azepin-3-yl]-N--
4-(hydroxy)-2-(2-methylpropyl)-3-(propyl)-butanediamide
[0764] 37
[0765] Step (1a): Di-tert-butyldicarbonate (10.2 g, 46.7 mmoles)
was added portion wise to a solution of
L-(-)-.alpha.-amino-.epsilon.-caprolactam (5.0 g, 39.0 mmoles) in
dimethyl sulfoxide (30 mL). After 5 h at rt, the reaction was
partitioned between water (100 mL) and ethyl acetate. The combined
organic extracts were washed successively with 1 M HCl (50 mL),
brine, and dried (MgSO.sub.4) and concentrated in vacuo. The
residue was recrystallized in 1:1 v/v ether-hexanes, two crops
yielded the desired product (6.26 g, 70%) as white solid. MS
(M+H-BOC).sup.+=129.
[0766] Step (1b): Triphenylphosphine (3.0 g, 11.4 mmoles) and
carbon tetrabromide (3.75 g, 11.7 mmoles) were added successively
to a cooled (0.degree. C.) solution of 3,3-biphenyl-1-propanol (1.5
mL, 7.5 mmoles) in dichloromethane (20 mL). After 1.5 hours at rt,
the mixture was concentrated in vacuo. The residue was purified by
flash chromatography on silica gel (hexanes) to give the desired
product (1.93 g, 93% yield) as a clear oil. MS
(M-BrC.sub.2H.sub.4).sup.+=167
[0767] Step (1c): A 1.0 M tetrahydrofuran solution of lithium
bis(trimethylsilyl)amide (1.3 mL) was added over 15 minutes to
compound of Step (1a) (0.29 g, 1.27 mmoles) in tetrahydrofuran (3
mL) and DMPU (2 mL) at -78.degree. C. The iodo compound prepared
from compound (1b) (0.85 g, 3.09 mmoles) by typical Finkelstein
methodology, in tetrahydrofuran (4 mL) was added and the reaction
was allowed to warm to rt slowly. This was stirred for 10 hours at
ambient temperature, partitioned between water and ethyl acetate.
The combined organic extracts were washed successively with water
(20 mL), brine (20 mL), and dried (MgSO.sub.4) and concentrated in
vacuo. The resulting residue was purified by silica gel column
(ethyl acetate:hexanes, 5:95 then ethyl acetate:hexanes, 15:85) to
give the desired product (0.16 g, 30%). MS (M-Ot-Bu).sup.+=349.
[0768] Step (1d): Trifluoroacetic acid (3 mL) was added to a
solution of compound of Step (1c) (0.16 mg, 0.38 mmoles) in
dichloromethane (9 mL). After 2 h at rt, the solvent was removed in
vacuo. The residual trifluoroacetic acid was removed by azeotrope
with dichloromethane (50 mL), toluene (50 mL), and dichloromethane
(50 mL) successively to give the desired product (0.17 g, 99%) as a
yellow oil. MS (M+H).sup.+=323.
[0769] Step (1e): 4-Methylmorpholine (0.6 mL, 5.46 mmoles) and TBTU
(0.11 g, 0.34 mmoles) were added to a solution of succinate acid
(P. Becket, M. J. Crimmin, M. H. Davis, Z. Spavold, Synlett,
(1993), 137-138) (0.085 g, 0.31 mmoles) in N,N-dimethylformamide (3
mL). After 30 minutes at rt, the compound from step (1d) (0.17 g,
0.39 mmoles) was added to the mixture. The reaction was stirred for
16 h at rt, then partitioned between 1 M HCl (20 mL) and ethyl
acetate. The combined organic extracts were washed successively
with saturated aqueous sodium bicarbonate (20 mL), water (20 mL),
brine (20 mL), dried (MgSO.sub.4) and concentrated in vacuo. The
residue was purified by silica gel chromatography (ethyl
acetate:hexanes, 7:93 gradient to ethyl acetate:hexanes 25:75) to
give the desired product (120 mg, 67%) as a clear oil. MS
(M+NH.sub.4-Ot-Bu).sup.+=521.
[0770] Step (1f): Trifluoroacetic acid (3 mL) was added to a
solution of compound of Step (1e) (120 mg, 0.21 mmoles) in
dichloromethane (9 mL). After 3 hours at rt, the mixture was
concentrated in vacuo. The residual trifluoroacetic acid was
removed by azeotrope with toluene (1.times.50 mL) and
dichloromethane (1.times.50 mL). The residue was triturated with
Et.sub.2O:Hexanes 95:5, to give the desired product (75 mg, 70%) as
a white solid. MS (M-H).sup.-=519.
[0771] Step (1g): 4-Methylmorpholine (0.05 mL, 0.45 mmoles) and BOP
(73 mg, 0.17 mmoles) were added to a solution of compound of Step
(1f) (60 mg, 0.12 mmoles) in N,N-dimethylformamide (2 mL).
Hydroxylamine (33 mg, 0.47 mmoles) was added to the mixture, the
reaction was stirred for 16 h at rt, was concentrated in vacuo, was
acidified with trifluoroacetic acid, then purified by reverse phase
HPLC on a Vydac C-18 column, to give the desired hydroxamic acid as
a white solid (45 mg, 75%). MS (M-H).sup.-=534.
Example 2
(2R,3S)
N1-[(3S)-hexahydro-1-(3-phenoxybenzyl)-2-oxo-1H-azepin-3-yl]-N-4-(-
hydroxy)-2-(2-methylpropyl)-3-(propyl)-butanediamide
[0772] 38
[0773] Step (2a): Triphenylphosphine (3.40 g, 13.0 mmoles) and
carbontetrabromide (4.20 g, 13.0 mmoles) were added successively to
a solution of m-phenoxybenzyl alcohol (1.5 mL, 8.6 mmoles). After 4
h at rt the mixture was concentrated and was purified by silica gel
column (hexanes, then ethyl acetate:hexanes, 5:95) to give the
desired bromide (1.3 g, 57%) as a yellow oil. MS
(M-Br).sup.+=183.
[0774] Step (2b): A 1 M solution of lithium
bis(trimethylsilyl)amide was added dropwise to a solution of
compound of Step (1a) (0.3 g, 1.31 mmoles) in tetrahydrofuran (5
mL) at -78.degree. C. After 30 minutes a solution of compound of
Step (2a) (0.43 g, 1.63 mmoles) in tetrahydrofuran (4 mL) was added
to the mixture dropwise. The reaction was allowed to come to
ambient temperature, stirred for 16 h, then partitioned between
water and ethyl acetate. The combined organic extracts were washed
successively with water (20 mL), brine (20 mL), dried (MgSO.sub.4)
and concentrated in vacuo. The crude residue was purified by silica
gel chromatography (ethyl acetate:hexanes, 5:95 then ethyl
acetate:hexanes, 15:85) to give the desired product (360 mg, 67%)
as a clear oil. MS (M-Ot-Bu).sup.+=337.
[0775] Step (2c): Trifluoroacetic acid (5 mL) was added to a
solution of compound of Step (2b) in dichloromethane (15 mL). After
3 h at rt the solution was concentrated in vacuo. The residual
trifluoroacetic acid was removed from residue by azeotrope with
toluene (50 mL) then dichloromethane (30 mL) to yield the desired
amine (390 mg, 99%) as a clear oil. MS (M+H).sup.+=311.
[0776] Step (2d): Following a procedure analogous to the
preparation of Step (1e), but using the compound from of Step (2c)
(390 mg, 0.88 mmoles) the amide was prepared, The crude compound
was purified by silica gel chromatography to give the desired
product (0.38 g, 92%) as a yellow oil. MS (M-Ot-Bu).sup.+=491.
[0777] Step (2e): Following a procedure analogous to the
preparation of step (1f), but using the compound from Step (2d)
(380 mg, 0.67 mmoles), the carboxylic acid was prepared. The
product was precipitated from ethyl ether with hexanes, to give the
desired acid (227 mg, 66%) as a white solid. MS
(M-H).sup.-=507.
[0778] Step (2f): Following a procedure analogous to the
preparation of compound of Step (1 g), but using the compound from
step (2e) (150 mg, 0.29 mmoles) the title compound was prepared.
The crude was purified by reverse phase HPLC on a Vydac C-18 column
to give the desired product (90 mg, 58%) as a white solid. MS
(M-H).sup.-=522.
Example 3
(2R,3S)
N1-[(3S)-hexahydro-1-(phenyl)-2-oxo-1H-azepin-3-yl]-N-4-(hydroxy)--
2-(2-methylpropyl)-3-(propyl)-butanediamide
[0779] 39
[0780] Step (3a): Triethylamine (1.5 mL, 10.8 mmoles), copper (II)
acetate (0.95 g, 5.2 mmoles) and phenylboric acid (1.6 g, 13.1
mmoles) were added successively to a solution of compound of Step
(1a) (1.0 g, 4.4 mmoles) in dichloromethane (20 mL). After 2.5 h at
rt, more phenylboric acid (0.5 g, 4.1 mmoles) was added to the
mixture. After an additional 3 hours at rt more phenylboric acid
(0.5 g, 4.1 mmoles) was added to the mixture. After 65 h at rt, the
mixture was filtered over celite. The filtrate was concentrated in
vacuo, and the residue was purified by silica gel chromatography
(ethyl acetate:hexanes, 5:95 then 15:85) to give the desired
product (250 mg, 19%). MS (M-Ot-Bu).sup.+=231.
[0781] Step (3b): Following a procedure analogous to the
preparation of compound of Step (2c), but using compound of Step
(3a) (250 mg, 0.82 mmoles), the amine (300 mg, 99%) was prepared as
a yellow oil. MS (M+H).sup.+=205.
[0782] Step (3c): Following a procedure analogous to the
preparation of compound of Step (1e), but using compound from Step
(3b) (0.3 g, 0.94 mmoles), the amide was prepared. The residue was
purified by silica gel chromatography (ethyl acetate:hexanes, 5:95
to 20:80 in 5% increments, 500 mL each ratio) to give the desired
product (210 mg, 60%) as a clear oil. MS (M+H-t-Bu).sup.+=403.
[0783] Step (3d): Following a procedure analogous to the
preparation of compound of Step (1f), but using compound from sStep
(3c) (200 mg, 0.44 mmoles) the acid was prepared. The crude oil was
triturated with ether:hexanes 1:1 to give the desired acid (114 mg,
65%) as a white solid. MS (M-OH).sup.+=385.
[0784] Step (3e): Following a procedure analogous to the
preparation of compound of Step (1g), but using compound from Step
(3d) (82 mg, 0.20 mmoles) the title compound was prepared. The
crude product was purified by reverse phase HPLC on a Vydac C-18
column to give the desired product (80 mg, 94%). MS
(M-H).sup.-=416.
Example 4
(2R,3S)
N1-[(3S)-hexahydro-1-(3-phenoxybenzyl)-2-oxo-1H-azepin-3-yl]-N-4-(-
methyl)-2-(2-methylpropyl)-3-(propyl)-butanediamide
[0785] 40
[0786] Following a procedure analogous to the preparation of
Example 3, compound of Step (2e) (100 mg, 0.20 mmol) was treated
with HATU (O-(7-azabenzotriazol-1-yl)-1,1,3,3,-tetramethyluronium
hexafluorophosphate) (114 mg, 0.30 mmol) and N-methyl morpholine
(66 mL, 0.6 mmol) in 2 mL of DMF for 15 min at rt. A solution of
2.0 M methylamine in THF (0.2 mL, 0.4 mmol) was added and the
reaction solution was stirred for 1 h at rt. The reaction solution
was diluted with 1N HCl (5 mL) and extracted 3.times. with 10 mL of
ethyl acetate. The combined organic layers were washed with a
saturated sodium bicarbonate solution (5 mL) and brine (5 mL),
dried over magnesium sulfate, and concentrated in vacou to provide
the crude amide. Purification by reverse phase HPLC on a Vydac-18
column provided the desired amide (30 mg, 30%). MS
(M+Na).sup.+=544.
Example 5
(2R,3S)
N1-[(3S)-hexahydro-1-(3-phenoxybenzyl)-2-oxo-1H-azepin-3-yl]-N-4-(-
methoxy)-N-4-(methyl)-2-(2-methylpropyl)-3-(propyl)-butanediamide
[0787] 41
[0788] Following a procedure analogous to the preparation of
Example 4, compound of Step (2e) (100 mg, 0.20 mmol) was activated
and condensed with N,O-dimethylhydroxylamine hydrochloride (40 mg,
0.40 mmol). Purification by reverse phase HPLC on a Vydac-18 column
provided the desired amide (30 mg, 30%). MS (M+Na).sup.+=574.
Example 6
(2R,3S)
N1-[(3S)-hexahydro-1-(3-phenoxybenzyl)-2-oxo-1H-azepin-3-yl]-N-4-(-
methoxy)-2-(2-methylpropyl)-3-(propyl)-butanediamide
[0789] 42
[0790] Following a procedure analogous to the preparation of
Example 4, compound of Step (2e) (100 mg, 0.20 mmol) was activated
and condensed with O-methylhydroxylamine hydrochloride (40 mg, 0.40
mmol). Purification by reverse phase HPLC on a Vydac-18 column
provided the desired amide (30 mg, 30%). MS (M+Na).sup.+=560.
Example 7
(2R,3S)
N1-[(3S)-hexahydro-1-(3-phenoxybenzyl)-2-oxo-1H-azepin-3-yl]-2-(2--
methylpropyl)-3-(propyl)-butanediamide
[0791] 43
[0792] Following a procedure analogous to the preparation of
Example 4, compound of Step (2e) (100 mg, 0.20 mmol) was activated
and condensed with a 2.0 M solution of ammonia in dioxane (0.2 mL,
0.4 mmol). Purification by reverse phase HPLC on a Vydac-18 column
provided the desired amide (30 mg, 30%). MS (M+Na).sup.+=530.
44
[0793] Example 7T was synthesized by reducing the double bond
present in the compound of Example 8. Thus, the compound of Example
8 was dissolved in tetrahydrofuran and hydrogenated using tritium
gas, by methods known to one skilled in the art organic synthesis.
Purification by reverse phase HPLC on a Vydac-18 column provided
the desired tritiated amide Example 7T wherein m is approximately
2.
Example 8
(2R,3S)
N1-[(3S)-hexahydro-1-(3-phenoxybenzyl)-2-oxo-1H-azepin-3-yl]-2-(2--
methylpropyl)-3-(propyl)-butanediamide
[0794] 45
[0795] Example 8 was synthesized following a procedure analogous to
the preparation of Example 7, but using succinate 9 (Scheme 2). The
compound was purified by chromatography eluting with 5% methanol in
CH.sub.2Cl.sub.2 to afford approx. 500 mg of Example 8. MS
(M+Na).sup.+=528.
Example 9
(2R,3S)
N1-[(3S)-hexahydro-1-(3-phenoxybenzyl)-2-oxo-1H-azepin-3-yl]-N-4-(-
hydroxy)-2-(2-methylpropyl)-3-(allyl)-butanediamide
[0796] 46
[0797] Example 9 was synthesized following a procedure analogous to
the preparation of Example 2, but using succinate 9 (Scheme 2).
Purification by reverse phase HPLC on a Vydac-18 column provided
150 mg of Example (9). MS (M+Na).sup.+=544.
Example 10
(2R,3S)
N1-[(3S)-hexahydro-1-(benzophenon-3yl)-2-oxo-1H-azepin-3-yl]-2-(2--
methylpropyl)-3-(allyl)-butanediamide
[0798] 47
[0799] (Step 10-a): 3-Bromomethylbenzophenone. A solution of
3-methylbenzophenone (20 g, 102 mmol) dissolved in 40 mL of
1,2-dibromoethane was heated to reflux. Over a period of about 3
hours a solution of 105 mmol of bromine dissolved in 6 mL of
1,2-dibromoethane was added to the refluxing solution. After the
addition was complete the solution was allowed to cool to rt and
diluted with 100 mL of dichloromethane. The organic layer was
extracted with 1.times.25 mL of 1 N HCl, 2.times.15 mL of
NaHCO.sub.3 Solution, and 2.times.25 mL of brine. The organic
layers were dried over magnesium sulfate and concentrated in vacuo.
The residue was then distilled to afford the product, 16.5 g (60%)
as an oil that solidified upon standing, b.p. 160.degree. C. at 300
mTorr. .sup.1H NMR analysis shows that the product contains
approximately 7% of the dibromide.
[0800] Step (10-b):
3-(1,1-dimethylethylcarbomethoxy-N-(benzophenone-3-yl--
methyl)caprolactam. Diisopropylamine (4.2 mL, 30 mmol) was
dissolved in 25 mL of THF and chilled to -78.degree. C. To the
solution was added 10 mL of 2.5M n-butyllithium in hexanes and the
solution was warmed to 0.degree. C. and allowed to stir for 10 min.
A solution of Boc-protected aminocaprolactam 1a (5.0 grams, 22
mmol) dissolved in 25 mL of THF was then added and the reaction
solution was stirred for 1 h at 0.degree. C. Solid
3-bromomethyl-benzophenone was then added and the reaction solution
was allowed to warm to rt and stir overnight. The reaction solution
was diluted with water and extracted into ethyl acetate (100 mL).
The organic layer was rinsed with 2.times.25 mL of 1 N HCl,
2.times.25 mL of saturated NaHCO.sub.3 and 2.times.25 mL of brine,
dried over magnesium sulfate, and dried in vacuo. Chromatography
eluting with a gradient of 30% to 40% ethyl acetate in hexanes
afforded the pure benzophenone-substituted caprolactam derivative
(7.4 g, 80%). MS (M+Na).sup.+=445.
[0801] The title compound, Example 10, was synthesized in a manner
analagous to the synthesis of the compound of Example 8 using
succinate 9 and the benzophenone-substituted caprolactam derivative
of the previous step.
[0802] The compound was purified by crystallization from ethyl
acetate to afford 0.26 g of crystals. MS (M+Na).sup.+=540.
Example 11
(2R,3S)
N1-[(3S)-hexahydro-1-(benzophenon-3-yl)-2-oxo-1H-azepin-3-yl]-2-(2-
-methylpropyl)-3-(propyl)-butanediamide
[0803] 48
[0804] The compound of Example 11 was synthesized in a manner
analagous to the synthesis of the compound of Example 8 using
succinate 10 and the benzophenone-substituted caprolactam
derivative of Step (10-b). The compound was purified by
crystallization from ethyl acetate to afford 0.25 g of crystals. MS
(M+Na).sup.+=542.
[0805] Example 11T 49
[0806] Example 11T was synthesized by reducing the double bond
present in the compound of Example 10. Thus, the compound of
Example 11T was dissolved in tetrahydrofuran and hydrogenated using
tritium gas, by methods known to one skilled in the art organic
synthesis. Purification by reverse phase HPLC on a Vydac-18 column
provided the desired tritiated amide Example 11T wherein m is
approximately 2.
Example 13
(2R,3S)
N1-[(3s)-hexahydro-1-(3-(4-fluorophenyl)benzyl)-2-oxo-1H-azepin-3--
yl]-N-4-(hydroxy)-2-(2-methylpropyl)-3-(propyl)-butanediamide
[0807] 50
[0808] The general procedure reported for Scheme 5 was followed
using 4-fluorophenyl boronic acid. Purification afforded 5.0 mg
(54%) of the desired product. MS (M+Na).sup.+=548.
Example 16
(2R,3S)
N1-[(3S)-hexahydro-1-(3-(3-methylphenyl)benzyl)-2-oxo-1H-azepin-3--
yl]-N-4-(hydroxy)-2-(2-methylpropyl)-3-(propyl)-butanediamide
[0809] 51
[0810] The general procedure reported for Scheme 5 was followed
using 3-methylphenyl boronic acid. Purification afforded 3.0 mg
(33%) of the desired product. MS (M+Na).sup.+=544.
Example 22
(2R,3S)
N1-[(3S)-hexahydro-1-(3-(2-naphthyl)benzyl)-2-oxo-1H-azepin-3-yl]--
N-4-(hydroxy)-2-(2-methylpropyl)-3-(propyl)-butanediamide
[0811] 52
[0812] The general procedure reported for Scheme 5 was followed
using 2-naphthyl boronic acid. Purification afforded 3.0 mg (31%)
of the desired product. MS (M+Na).sup.+=580.
[0813] It will be understood by one skilled in the art that Scheme
6 can be followed in a manner analogous to the procedure for Scheme
5.
Example 23
(2R,3S)
N1-[(3S)-hexahydro-1-(3-(4-methoxyphenyl)benzyl)-2-oxo-1H-azepin-3-
-yl]-2-(2-methylpropyl)-3-(propyl)-butanediamide
[0814] 53
[0815] The general procedure reported for Scheme 6 was followed
using 4-methoxyphenyl boronic acid. Purification afforded 0.5 mg of
the desired product. MS (M+Na).sup.+=544.
Example 24
(2R,3S)
N1-[(3S)-hexahydro-1-(3-(3-fluorophenyl)benzyl)-2-oxo-1H-azepin-3--
yl]-2-(2-methylpropyl)-3-(propyl)-butanediamide
[0816] 54
[0817] The general procedure reported for Scheme 6 was followed
using 3-fluorophenyl boronic acid. Purification afforded 1.6 mg of
the desired product. MS (M+Na).sup.+=532.
Example 25
(2R,3S)
N1-[(3S)-hexahydro-1-(3-(4-trifluoromethylphenyl)-benzyl)-2-oxo-1H-
-azepin-3-yl]-2-(2-methylpropyl)-3-(propyl)-butanediamide
[0818] 55
[0819] The general procedure reported for Scheme 6 was followed
using 4-trifluoromethylphenyl boronic acid. Purification afforded
2.0 mg (40%) of the desired product. MS (M+Na).sup.+=582.
Example 26
(2R,3S)
N1-[(3S)-hexahydro-1-(3-(4-methoxyphenyl)benzyl)-2-oxo-1H-azepin-3-
-yl]-2-(2-methylpropyl)-3-(propyl)-butanediamide
[0820] 56
[0821] The general procedure reported for Scheme 6 was followed
using 4-methoxyphenyl boronic acid. Purification afforded 0.5 mg of
the desired product. MS (M+Na).sup.+=544.
Example 27
(2R,3S)
N1-[(3S)-hexahydro-1-(3-(2,4-dichlorophenyl)benzyl)-2-oxo-1H-azepi-
n-3-yl]-2-(2-methylpropyl)-3-(propyl)-butanediamide
[0822] 57
[0823] The general procedure reported for Scheme 6 was followed
using 2,6-dichlorophenyl boronic acid. Purification afforded 1.8 mg
(11%) of the desired product. MS (M+Na).sup.+=582.
Example 28
(2R,3S)
N1-[(3S)-hexahydro-1-(3-(4-methylphenyl)benzyl)-2-oxo-1H-azepin-3--
yl]-2-(2-methylpropyl)-3-(propyl)-butanediamide
[0824] 58
[0825] The general procedure reported for Scheme 6 was followed
using 4-tolyl boronic acid. Purification afforded 1.8 mg (12%) of
the desired product. MS (M+Na).sup.+=528.
Example 29
(2R,3S)
N1-[(3S)-hexahydro-1-(3-(3-chloro-4-fluorophenyl)-benzyl)-2-oxo-1H-
-azepin-3-yl]-2-(2-methylpropyl)-3-(propyl)-butanediamide
[0826] 59
[0827] The general procedure reported for Scheme 6 was followed
using 4-fluoro-3-chlorophenyl boronic acid. Purification afforded
0.5 mg (3.3%) of the desired product. MS (M+Na).sup.+=567.
Example 30
(2R,3S)
N1-[(3S)-hexahydro-1-(3-(3-methoxyphenyl)benzyl)-2-oxo-1H-azepin-3-
-yl]-2-(2-methylpropyl)-3-(propyl)-butanediamide
[0828] 60
[0829] The general procedure reported for Scheme 6 was followed
using 2-methoxyphenyl boronic acid. Purification afforded 0.8 mg
(5.3%) of the desired product. MS (M+Na).sup.+=544.
Example 31
(2R,3S)
N1-[(3S)-hexahydro-1-(3-(2-methoxyphenyl)benzyl)-2-oxo-1H-azepin-3-
-yl]-2-(2-methylpropyl)-3-(propyl)-butanediamide
[0830] 61
[0831] The general procedure reported for Scheme 6 was followed
using 2-methoxyphenyl boronic acid. Purification afforded 1.5 mg
(10%) of the desired product. MS (M+Na).sup.+=544.
[0832] It will be understood by one skilled in the art that Scheme
7 can be followed in a manner analogous to the procedure for
Schemes 5 and 6.
Example 32
(2R,3S)
N1-[(3S)-hexahydro-1-(3-(4-methoxyphenyl)pyrid-5-ylmethyl)-2-oxo-1-
H-azepin-3-yl]-2-(2-methylpropyl)-3-(propyl)-butanediamide
[0833] 62
[0834] Amide 35 of Scheme 7 (0.10 g, 0.18 mmol) was dissolved in 5
mL of toluene and 41 mg (0.27 mmol) of 4-methoxyphenyl boronic acid
was added, followed by 31 mg (0.0147 mmol) of
tetrakis(triphenylphosphine)palladium, 0.5 mL of a 2M sodium
cabonate solution and 0.5 mL of methanol. The reaction solution was
heated to reflux for 16 h and then allowed to cool to rt. The
reaction solution was diluted with 10 mL of water and extracted
2.times. with 50 mL of ethyl acetate. The combined organic layers
were dried and concentrated and the resulting oil was purified by
chromatography eluting with 30 to 100% ethyl acetate in hexanes as
a solvent to provide 30 mg (29%) of biaryl product. MS
(M+H).sup.+=580.
[0835] The purified biaryl product was dissolved in 10 mL of 1:1
trifluoroacetic acid/CH.sub.2Cl.sub.2 and stirred at rt for 2 h.
The solvents were then removed under reduced pressure and the
resulting oil was redissolved in 5 mL of toluene and reconcentrated
to remove residual TFA. The crude acid (25 mg, 0.047 mmol) was then
dissolved in 1 mL of DMF and 10 .mu.L of N-methylmorpholine (0.094
mmol) and 42 mg (0.062 mmol) HATU were added and the reaction
solution was stirred at rt for 45 min. Gaseous ammonia was then
bubbled in at a gentle rate for about 1 minute and the solution was
stirred for an additional 1 min. The reaction solution was then
diluted with 10 mL of water and extracted 3.times. with 30 mL of
ethyl acetate. The combined organic layers were dried and
concentrated under reduced pressure to a solid which was purified
by reversed phase HPLC to provide 3.5 mg (10%) of the compound of
Example 30 as its trifluoroacetic acid salt. MS
(M+H).sup.+=523.
Example 33
(2R,3S)
N1-[(3S)-hexahydro-1-(3-(4-trifluoromethylphenyl)pyrid-5-ylmethyl)-
-2-oxo-1H-azepin-3-yl]-2-(2-methylpropyl)-3-(propyl)-butanediamide
[0836] 63
[0837] The general procedure reported for the compound of Example
32 was followed using 4-trifluoromethylphenyl boronic acid.
Purification by HPLC afforded 6.0 mg of the desired product from as
its trifluoroacetic acid salt. MS (M+Na).sup.+=583.
Example 34
(2R,3S)
N1-[(3S)-hexahydro-1-(3-(3-chloro-4-fluorophenyl)pyrid-5-ylmethyl)-
-2-oxo-1H-azepin-3-yl]-2-(2-methylpropyl)-3-(propyl)-butanediamide
[0838] 64
[0839] Amide 35 (0.30 g, 0.54 mmol) was dissolved in 3 mL of DMF
and 123 mg (0.70 mmol) of 4-methoxyphenyl boronic acid was added,
followed by 44 mg (0.0543 mmol) of bis(diphenylphosphinoferrocene)
palladium (II) dichloride and 1.0 mL (7.18 mmol) of triethylamine.
The reaction solution was heated to 80.degree. C. for 24 h and then
allowed to cool to rt. The reaction solution was diluted with 10 mL
of water and extracted 2.times. with 50 mL of ethyl acetate. The
combined organic layers were dried and concentrated and the
resulting oil was purified by chromatography eluting with 20 to
100% ethyl acetate in hexanes as a solvent to provide 140 mg (50%)
of biaryl product. MS (M+Na).sup.+=624.
[0840] The general procedure reported for the compound of Example
32 was then followed to provide the amide. Purification by
chromatography eluting with 20 to 100% ethyl acetate in hexanes
afforded 45 mg of the desired product of Example 34 as its
trifluoroacetic acid salt. MS (M+Na).sup.+=567.
Example 39
(2R,3S)
N1-[(3S)-hexahydro-1-(4-(4-trifluoromethylphenyl)-benzyl)-2-oxo-1H-
-azepin-3-yl]-2-(2-methylpropyl)-3-(propyl)-butanediamide
[0841] 65
Step (39-a)
3-(1,1-dimethylethylcarbomethoxy-N-(4-bromophenylmethyl)caprol-
actam
[0842] The title compound was synthesized in a manner analogous to
the preparation of
3-(1,1-dimethylethylcarbomethoxy-N-(benzophenone-3-yl-meth-
yl)caprolactam in Example 10 but using 4-bromobenzyl bromide as the
alkylating agent. The compound was purified by chromatography
eluting with 5-20% ethyl acetate in hexanes as eluent to provide
7.0 g (70%) of the title compound as a solid. MS (M+Na)+=419.
Step (39-b)
3-(1,1-dimethylethylcarbomethoxy-N-(4,-(4'-trifluoromethylphen-
yl)phenylmethyl)caprolactam
[0843] To a solution of
3-(1,1-dimethylethylcarbomethoxy-N-(4-bromophenylm-
ethyl)caprolactam (0.5 g, 1.26 mmol) dissolved in 10 mL of toluene
was added 263 mg (1.38 mmol) of 4-trifluoromethylphenyl boronic
acid, 1 mL of methanol, and 1 mL of a 2M solution of potassium
carbonate. The solution was degassed by nitrogen bubbling for 5
min, and then 33 mg of tris(dibenzylideneacetone)dipalladium(0)
chloroform adduct and 66 mg of triphenylphosphine was added. The
solution ws heated to reflux for 16 h and then allowed to cool and
diluted with 20 mL of water. The aqueous layer was extracted
3.times. with 25 mL of ethyl acetate and concentrated. The
resulting oil was purified by chromatography eluting with 20% ethyl
acetate in hexanes to afford 0.47 g (81%) of an oil which
crystallized on standing.
[0844] Step (39-d) The title compound, Example 39, was synthesized
in a manner analagous to the synthesis of the compound of Example 8
using succinate 10 (280 mg, 1.04 mmol) and
3-(1,1-dimethylethylcarbomethoxy-N-(-
4,-(4'-trifluoromethylphenyl)-phenylmethyl)caprolactam. The
compound was purified by chromatography eluting with 20-100% ethyl
acetate in hexanes to afford 40 mg of a white powder. MS
(M+H)+=560.
Example 40
(2S,3R)
N1-[(3S)-hexahydro-1-(3-(2-tetrazolylphenyl)benzyl)-2-oxo-1H-azepi-
n-3-yl]-2-(propyl)-3-(2-methylpropyl)-butanediamide
[0845] 66
[0846] Step (40-a): The compound of Example 40 was synthesized in a
manner analogous to the synthesis of the compound of Example 39,
but using the substituted acid 28 of Scheme 6 (50 mg, 0.10 mmol)
and o-((N-trityl)-tetrazole)phenylboronic acid under the conditions
for the formation of the compound (39-b). The desired biaryl acid
was isolated as an impure mixture (134 mg) and used directly in
Step (40-b).
[0847] Step (40-b): The acid from Step (40-a) (134 mg, impure
mixture) was converted to the amide under the conditions reported
for the compound of Example 7. The crude amide was then dissolved
in 2 mL of 10% trifluoroacetic acid in methanol and allowed to stir
at rt for 30 min. The solvents were removed and the residue was
purified by chromatography eluting with 10% methanol in ethyl
acetate to provide 40 mg (71%, 2 steps) of the compound of Example
40 as a sticky powder. MS (M+Na)+=582.
Example 41
(2S,3R)
N1-[(3S)-hexahydro-1-(3-phenoxybenzyl)-2-oxo-1H-azepin-3-yl]-2-(pr-
opyl)-3-(2-methylpropyl)-butanediamide
[0848] 67
[0849] Step (41-a): The compound of Example 41 is formed by
coupling Succinate 23 (480 mg, 1.21 mmol) with the substituted
caprolactam TFA salt 2c under the conditions reported for the
synthesis of the compound of Example 8. The crude fluorenylmethyl
ester was used in the next step with out further purification. MS
(M+Na)+=709.
[0850] Step (41-b): The crude fluorenylmethyl ester is dissolved in
2 mL of a 50% solution of piperidine in CH.sub.2Cl.sub.2 and
stirred for 3 h at rt. A 10 mL portion of 1N HCl was then added and
the mixture was extracted 3.times. with 10 mL of ethyl acetate. The
crude acid was used in the next step with out further purification.
MS (M+H)+=509.
[0851] The compound of Example 41 was then prepared using the acid
from Step (41-b) under the conditions reported for compound of
Example 7. The compound was purified by chromatography eluting with
5% methanol in CH.sub.2Cl.sub.2 to afford 120 mg (19%, 3 steps) of
a white powder. MS (M+H).sup.+=508.
Example 42
(2S,3R)
N1-[1,3-dihydro-1-(3-phenoxybenzyl)-2-oxo-5-(phenyl)-2H-1,4-benzod-
iazepin-3-yl]-2-(2-methylpropyl)-3-(allyl)-butanediamide
[0852] 68
Step (42-a) 3-Phenoxybenzyl Iodide
[0853] To a solution of 3-phenoxybenzyl chloride (10.0 g, 45.7
mmol) in 200 ml acetone was added sodium iodide (7.6 g, 507 mmol).
The mixture was stirred at temperature overnight. The mixture was
diluted with 300 ml hexane and the organic layer was washed twice
with 5% sodium bicarbonate, once with brine and then dried over
MgSO.sub.4. Evaporation of the filtrate gave a light yellow oil.
The product was used in next step without purification. .sup.1H NMR
(CDCl.sub.3) 4.4 (s, 2H), 6.8-7.4 (m, 9H).
Step (42-b)
[0854] 69
[0855] To a solution of benzodiazepine 50 (910 mg, 3.63 mmol),
succinate 9 (980 mg, 3.63 mmol), hydroxybenzotriazole (980 mg.,
7.25 mmol) and EDC (870 mg, 4.54 mmol) in 100 ml CH.sub.2Cl.sub.2
at 0 degrees was added triethylamine (0.76 ml, 5.45 mmol). The
reaction mixture was washed with saturated sodium bicarbonate
solution, 1.0N HCl, brine and dried over MgSO.sub.4. Evaporation of
the organic layer and purification by column chromatography on
silica gel with hexane-ethyl acetate (7:3) gave 610 mg of
benzodiazepine 51 as a white solid. M+H=504.37. .sup.1H NMR
(CDCl.sub.3) 0.8-1.0 (m, 6H), 1.0-1.2 (m, 1H), 1.4-1.5 (d, 9H),
1.6-1.9 (m, 2H), 2.2-2.8 (m, 4H), 4.9-5.2 (m, 2H), 5.6 (dd, 1H),
5.6-6.0 (m, 1H), 7.0-7.6 (m, 9H).
Step (42-c)
[0856] 70
[0857] To a solution of benzodiazepine 51 (440 mg, 0.875 mmol) in
DMF (20 ml) at 0 degrees was added NaH (45 mg, 1.12 mmol). The
mixture was stirred at 0 degrees for 1.5 hr and then a solution of
3-phenoxy]benzyl iodide (330 mg, 1.06 mmol) in 10 ml DMF was added
dropwise. The reaction mixture was allowed to warm to room
temperature and stirred overnight. TLC using hexanes:EtOAc 6:4
(product Rf=0.31) indicated that the reaction was complete. The
reaction mixture was quenched with water, and the solvent was
evaporated under high vacuum, which provided a viscous yellow oil.
The product benzodiazepine 52 was dissolved in ethyl acetate, which
was washed with water (2.times.), brine and then dried over
MgSO.sub.4.
[0858] Evaporation of solvent gave 600 mg of benzodiazepine 52 as a
yellow oil which was not further purified. M+H=686.3, M+Na=708.3.
.sup.1H NMR (CDCl.sub.3) 0.8-1.0 (m, 6H), 1.0-1.3 (m, 1H), 1.4-1.5
(d, 9H), 1.5-1.9 (2H), 2.2-2.7 (4H), 4.6-4.8 (d, 1H), 4.9-5.2 (m,
2H), 5.6-5.9 (m, 3H), 6.6-7.6 (m, 18H).
[0859] A solution of benzodiazepine 52 in 40 ml of
TFA/CH.sub.2Cl.sub.2 (1:1) was stirred overnight at room
temperature then evaporated to dryness. Repeated addition of
toluene and evaporation provided 560 mg. of 53 as a yellow solid.
(M-H=629.1)
Step (42-d)
[0860] 71
[0861] To a solution of benzodiazepine 53 and HATU (410 mg, 1.08
mmol) in 30 ml DMF was added diisopropylethylamine (0.6 ml, 3.44
mmol) at 0 degrees. After 10 minutes, ammonia gas was bubbled
through the solution for two minutes, and the reaction mixture was
allowed to warm to room temperature and stirred overnight. Addition
of water and solvent evaporation under high vacuum provided a
yellow solid. The solid was taken up in ethyl acetate-water (1:1),
and the organic layer was washed with water (2.times.), brine and
then dried over MgSO.sub.4. Evaporation of solvent gave a light
yellow solid. Chromatographic purification on silica gel using
CH.sub.2Cl.sub.2: methanol (10:0.5) gave 256 mg of Example 42.
M+H=629.2 HNMR (CDCl.sub.3) 0.8-1.0 (m, 6H), 1.2-1.4 (m, 1H),
1.6-2.0 (m, 2H), 2.2-2.8(4H), 4.6-4.8 (m, 1H), 5.0-5.2(m, 2H),
5.6-5.9 (m, 3H), 6.2-7.8 (m, 18H).
Example 43
(2S,3R)
N1-[1,3-dihydro-1-methyl-2-oxo-5-(phenyl)-2H-1,4-benzodiazepin-3-y-
l]-2-(2-methylpropyl)-3-(allyl)-butanediamide
[0862] 72
Step (43-a)
[0863] 73
[0864] A solution of tert-butyl succinate ester 9 (1.1 eq.) in DMF
(0.25 M) under N.sub.2 at 0.degree. C. was added HATU (1.1 eq.),
then Hunig's base (4.0eq.). The mixture was stirred at 0.degree. C.
for 10 mins. A solution of
2,3-dihydro-1-methyl-3-amino-5-phenyl-1H-1,4-benzodiazepin-2-- one
54 in DMF (0.8 M) (1.0 eq.) was added to this solution. The
reaction mixture was stirred overnight at room temperature and then
transfered to a separatory funnel containing water. 30% n-Hexane in
ethyl acetate was added which gave a clear organic layer. The
aqueous solution was extracted twice with 30% n-hexane in ethyl
acetate. The combined organic layers were washed with water and
brine, dried over magnesium sulfate, and concentrated in vacuo. The
residue was purified by chromatography on flash grade silica gel
using 20% ethyl acetate in n-hexane. The compound 55 was isolated
as an amorphous white solid (85%). Rf=0.25 (7:3 n-hexane:ethyl
acetate).
[0865] .sup.1H-NMR:(CDCl.sub.3): .delta. 7.61-7.21 (m, 10H);
5.77-5.73 (m, 1H); 5.57-5.54 (d, 1H); 5.20-4.97 (m, 2H); 3.47 (s,
3H); 2.63-2.33 (m, 4H); 1.80-1.76 (m, 2H); 1.47-1.46 (d, 9H);
1.43-1.11 (m, 1H); 1.01-0.86 (m, 6H).
[0866] MS: C.sub.31H.sub.39N.sub.3O.sub.4 (M+H) 518.3 (M+Na)
540.3.
Step (43-b)
[0867] 74
[0868] A solution of 55 in 50% TFA in methylene chloride (0.15M)
was stirred at room temperature overnight. The solution was
concentrated in vacuo, washed and concentrated four times with
toluene in vacuo to give compound 56 as an amorphous solid (95%).
Rf=0.64 (9.5:0.5 methylene chloride:methanol). MS:
C.sub.27H.sub.31N.sub.3O.sub.4 (M+H) 462.
Step (43-c)
[0869] 75
[0870] To a solution of 56 (1.0 eq.) in DMF (0.25 M) under N.sub.2
at 0.degree. C. was added HATU (1.1 eq.), and then Hunig's base
(4.0eq.). The mixture was stirred at 0.degree. C. for 10 mins, and
then anhydrous ammonia bubbled through the solution for two
minutes. The reaction mixture was stirred overnight at room
temperature and then transfered to a separatory funnel containing
water and diluted with 30% n-hexane in ethyl. The aqueous solution
was extracted twice with 30% n-hexane in ethyl acetate. The
combined organic layers were washed with water and brine, dried
over magnesium sulfate, and concentrated in vacuo. The residue was
purified by chromatography on flash grade silica gel using 4%
methanol in methylene chloride. The title compound, Example 43, was
isolated as an amorphous white solid (87%). Rf=0.43 (9:1 methylene
chloride:methanol).
[0871] .sup.1H NMR: (CDCl.sub.3): .delta. 7.63-7.22 (m, 10H);
6.25-6.13 (d, 1H) 5.88-5.73 (m, 1H); 5.53-5.51 (dd, 1H); 5.44-5.41
(d, 1H); 5.22-5.04 (m, 2H); 3.47-3.46 (d, 3H); 2.74-2.31 (m, 4H);
1.81-1.61 (m, 2H); 1.34-1.22 (m, 1H); 0.99-0.87 (m, 6H).
[0872] MS: C.sub.27H.sub.32N.sub.4O.sub.3 (M+H) 461.
[0873] It is understood that the (R) or (S)-benzodiazepine
diastereomer of Example 43 can be prepared using methods analogous
to the present example but employing the (R) or (S) stereoisomer of
intermediate 2a in Step (43-a), respectively.
Example 43T
Tritiated (2S,3R)
N1-[1,3-dihydro-1-methyl-2-oxo-5-(phenyl)-2H-1,4-benzodi-
azepin-3-yl]-2-(2-methylpropyl)-3-(n-propyl)-butanediamide
[0874] 76
[0875] Example 43T was synthesized by reducing the double bond
present in the (S)-benzodiazepine diastereomer of Example 43. The
(S) diastereomer of Example 43 may be separated from the product of
Step (43-c) by means known to one skilled in the art and the single
isomer reduced. Alternatively, this diastereomer may be prepared
directly as stated above. Thus, the (S)-benzodiazepine diastereomer
of Example 43 was dissolved in tetrahydrofuran and hydrogenated
using tritium gas, by methods known to one skilled in the art
organic synthesis. Purification by reverse phase HPLC on a Vydac-18
column provided the desired tritiated amide Example 43T wherein m
is approximately 2.
[0876] It is understood that one skilled in the art of organic
synthesis can synthesize radiolabeled compounds of the present
invention for use as a tagged inhibitor of beta-amyloid production
using radiolabeling techniques well know in the art. For example
tritiation, using catalysts such as Pd/C or Wilkinson's catalyst
and .sup.3H.sub.2 gas, one skilled in the art can reduce olefin
precursors. Examples of olefin precursors are Examples 8, 10, 42,
43, intermediate Succinate 10 and intermediate Benzodiazepine
51.
[0877] Representative Procedures for the Synthesis of Radiolabeled
Compounds
[0878] Described below are representative procedures for the
synthesis of radiolabeled compounds. These nonlimiting
representative procedures, and other procedures known in the art,
will be readily known and appreciated by one of skill in the art of
organic synthesis of radiolabeled compounds. The radiolabeled
ligands of macromolecules involved in the process of APP and/or
beta-amyloid production (the "radiolabeled ligands") of the present
invention can be synthesized using standard synthetic methods known
to those skilled in the art, using radioisotopes of halogens (such
as chlorine, fluorine, bromine and iodine), as well as others.
Radioisotopes include .sup.123I, .sup.125I, .sup.131I, .sup.99mTc,
and .sup.111In.
[0879] The radiolabeled ligands of the invention may be labeled
either directly (that is, by incorporating the radiolabel directly
into the compounds) or indirectly (that is, by incorporating the
radiolabel into the compounds through a chelator which has been
incorporated into the compounds. For brain imaging, it is expected
that direct labeling will be preferred in the present invention.
For direct labeling, as those skilled in the art will recognize,
the labeling may be isotopic or nonisotopic. With isotopic
labeling, one group already present in the compound is substituted
with (exchanged for) the radioisotope. With nonisotopic labeling,
the radioisotope is added to the compound without substituting with
(exchanging for) an already existing group.
[0880] Generally, labeled compounds are prepared by procedures
which introduce the labeled atom at a late stage of the synthesis.
This allows for maximum radiochemical yields, and reduces the
handling time of radioactive materials. When dealing with short
half-life isotopes, a major consideration is the time required to
conduct synthetic procedures, and purification methods. Protocols
for the synthesis of radiopharmaceuticals are described in Tubis
and Wolf, Eds., "Radiopharmacy", Wiley-Interscience, New York
(1976); Wolf, Christman, Fowler, Lambrecht, "Synthesis of
Radiopharmaceuticals and Labeled Compounds Using Short-Lived
Isotopes", in Radiopharmaceuticals and Labeled Compounds, Vol 1, p.
345-381 (1973), the disclosures of each of which are hereby
incorporated herein by reference, in their entirety.
[0881] Various procedures may be employed in preparing the
radiolabeled compounds of the invention where the radiolabel is a
halogen. Some common synthetic methodologies for isotopic halogen
labeling of aromatic compounds such as the type present here are
iododediazonization, iododeborobation, iododestannylation,
iododesilation, iododethallation, and halogen exchange reactions.
The most common synthetic methodology for nonisotopic halogen
labeling of aromatic compounds such as the type present here is
iododeprotonation or electrophilic aromatic substitution reactions.
These methods and additional procedures are described in Merkushev,
Synthesis, 923 (1988), and Seevers et al., Chem. Rev., 82: 575
(1982), the disclosures of each of which are hereby incorporated
herein by reference, in their entirety.
[0882] By way of example, isotopically radiolabeled 4, 5 and 6-halo
t-butyloxycarbonyl-3-aminomethylbenzoic acid derivatives may be
prepared using the general procedures described above for the
synthesis of the unlabeled compounds. In carrying out such
radiolabeling, it is important that the half-life of the isotope
chosen be much longer than the handling time of the reaction
sequences. Known starting materials include the 2, 3, and 4-iodo
(123I, 125I, and 131I) benzoic acids. Iodo-radiolabeled compounds
may also be isotopically prepared from anilines by the Sandmeyer
reaction as described in Ellis et al., Aust. J. Chem., 26: 907
(1973).
[0883] Alternatively, radiolabeled compounds may prepared by way of
isotopic labeling from an unlabeled bromo or iodo derivatives by
various two step reaction sequences, such as through the use of
trialkylsilyl synthons as described in Wilson et al., J. Org.
Chem., 51: 483 (1986) and Wilbur et al., J. Label. Compound.
Radiopharm., 19: 1171 (1982), the use of trialkylsilyl synthons as
described in Chumpradit et al. J. Med. Chem., 34: 877 (1991) and
Chumpradit et al J. Med. Chem., 32: 1431 (1989), and the use of
boronic acid synthons as described in Kabalka et al., J. Label.
Compound. Radiopharm., 19: 795 (1982) and Koch et al., Chem. Ber.,
124:2091 (1991).
[0884] In preparing radiolabeled compounds of the present
invention, to maximize radiochemical yields, to reduce the handling
time of radioactive materials, and to prepare short half-life
halogen labeled compounds, it is preferable to perform the isotopic
halogen labeling as one of the final steps in the compound
synthesis. The following provides exemplary proceudres for such
late stage labeling.
[0885] Unlabeled iodo compounds are versatile precursors which can
be converted to the labeled derivatives by any of the two step
reaction sequences described above. In general, useful
functionalities to incorporate into a compound includes bromo, the
nitro, the trialkylsilyl, the trialkyltin, and the boronic acid
groups. The synthesis and application of each of these precursors
is described above. Radioiodination of a compound of the present
invention may be achieved via isotopic labeling during the final
stages of preparation by the substitution of radioactive iodide for
a stable iodine atom already present in the molecule. This can
often be done by heating the compound with radioactive iodide in an
appropriate solvent as described in Ellis et al., Aust. J. Chem.,
26: 907 (1973).
[0886] In some cases radiolabeled compounds of the present
invention may also be isotopically iodo-labeled during the final
stages of their preparation from anilines by the Sandmeyer reaction
as described in Ellis et al., Aust. J. Chem., 26: 907 (1973).
Alternatively, a compound may be isotopically labeled late in the
reaction scheme from the unlabeled bromo or iodo derivatives by
various two step reaction sequences, as described above, such as
through the use of trialkylsilyl synthons as described in Wilson et
al., J. Org. Chem., 51: 4833 (1986) and Wilbur et al., J. Label.
Compound. Radiopharm., 19: 1171 (1982), through the use of
trialkylsilyl synthons as described in Chumpradit et al., J. Med.
Chem., 34: 877 (1991) and Chumpradit et al., J. Med. Chem., 32:
1431 (1989), and through the use of boronic acid synthons as
described in Kabalka et al., J. Label. Compound. Radiopharm., 19:
795 (1982) and Koch et al., Chem. Ber., 124:2091 (1991).
[0887] A related approach where the isotopic halogen radiolabeling
may be carried out late in the synthesis scheme involves converting
a synthetic intermediate compound that already incorporates a
trialkylsilyl, trialkyltin, or boronic acid groups. Labeled iodo
derivatives may also be readily prepared nonisotopically from the
amino, hydroxy, or methoxy substituted compounds as described in
Arora et al J. Med. Chem., 30:918 (1987). Electrophilic aromatic
substitution reactions are enhanced by the presence of such
electron-donating substituents.
[0888] Another representative approach to the incorporation of a
radiolabeled halogen in compounds containing methyl substituted
phenyl involves the conversion to a a-halotoluene derivative with
NBS or NCS under free-radical halogenation conditions. The benzylic
halides may be smoothly replaced by radiolabeled iodide through a
nucleophilic substitution reaction. The above described process
chemistry can also be used to prepare any radioactive halogen
isotope.
[0889] By way of illustration, .sup.18F derivatives of certain
compounds can be prepared by conjugation of .sup.18F functionalized
phenyl intermediates (R. H. Mach et al., J. Med. Chem., 1993,
36,3707-3720).
Utility
[0890] A.beta. production has been implicated in the pathology of
Alzheimer's Disease (AD). The compounds of the present invention as
well as compounds determined from the present invention have
utility for the prevention and treatment of AD by inhibiting the
proteolytic activity leading to A.beta. production. Methods of
treatment target formation of A.beta. production through the
enzymes involved in the proteolytic processing of .beta. amyloid
precursor protein. Compounds that inhibit .beta. or .gamma.
secretase activity, either directly or indirectly, control the
production of A.beta.. Such inhibition of .beta. or .gamma.
secretases reduces production of A.beta., and is expected to reduce
or prevent the neurological disorders associated with A.beta.
peptide, such as Alzheimer's Disease.
[0891] Cellular screening methods for inhibitors of A.beta.
production, testing methods for the in vivo suppression of A.beta.
production, and assays for the detection of secretase activity are
known in the art and have been disclosed in numerous publications,
including PCT publication number WO 98/22493, EPO publication
number 0652009, U.S. Pat. No. 5,703,129 and U.S. Pat. No.
5,593,846; all hereby incorporated by reference.
[0892] The compounds of the present invention as well as compounds
determined from the present invention have utility for the
prevention and treatment of disorders involving A.beta. production,
such as cerebrovascular disorders.
[0893] Compounds of Formula (I) are expected to possess
.gamma.-secretase inhibitory activity. The .gamma.-secretase
inhibitory activity of the compounds of the present invention is
demonstrated using assays for such activity, for example, using the
assay described below. Compounds within the scope of the present
invention have been shown to inhibit the activity of
.gamma.-secretase, as determined using assays for such
activity.
[0894] Compounds provided by this invention should also be useful
as standards and reagents in determining the ability of a potential
pharmaceutical to inhibit A.beta. production. These would be
provided in commercial kits comprising a compound of this
invention.
[0895] As used herein ".mu.g" or "ug" denotes microgram, "mg"
denotes milligram, "g" denotes gram, ".mu.L" denotes microliter,
"mL" denotes milliliter, "L" denotes liter, "nM" denotes nanomolar,
".mu.M" or "uM" denotes micromolar, "mM" denotes millimolar, "M"
denotes molar, "nm" denotes nanometer, "SDS" denotes sodium dodecyl
sulfate, and "DMSO" denotes dimethyl sulfoxide, and "EDTA" denotes
ethylenediaminetetraacetat- e.
[0896] A compound is considered to be active if it has an IC.sub.50
or K.sub.i value of less than about 100 .mu.M for the inhibition of
A.beta. production or inhibition of proteolytic activity leading to
A.beta. production. Compounds, as demonstrated by use of the
invention, have demonstrated IC.sub.50 values, for the inhibition
of A.beta. production, of less than about 100 .mu.M. Preferably
compounds, as demonstrated by use of the invention, demonstrate
IC.sub.50 values, for the inhibition of A.beta. production, of less
than about 1 .mu.M. More preferably compounds, as demonstrated by
use of the invention, demonstrate IC.sub.50 values, for the
inhibition of A.beta. production, of less than about 100 nM. Even
more preferably compounds, as demonstrated by use of the invention,
demonstrate IC.sub.50 values, for the inhibition of A.beta.
production, of less than about 50 nM.
[0897] .beta. Amyloid Precursor Protein Accumulation Assay
(.beta.APPA Assay)
[0898] An assay to evaluate the accumulation of A.beta. protein was
developed to detect potential inhibitors of secretases. The assay
uses the CHO N 9 cell line, characterized for expression of
exogenous APP by immunoblotting and immunoprecipitation.
[0899] The effect of test compounds on the accumulation of A.beta.
in the conditioned medium is tested by immunoprecipitation. N 9
cells are grown to confluency in 6-well plates and washed twice
with 1.times. Hank's buffered salt solution. The cells are starved
in methionine/cysteine deficient media for 30 min., followed by
replacement with fresh deficient media containing 150 uCi
Tran35S-LABEL.TM. (ICN). Test compounds dissolved in DMSO (final
concentration 1%) are added, over a range of 1 picomolar to 100
micromolar, together with the addition of the fresh media
containing Tran35S-LABEL.TM.. The cells are incubated for 4 h at
37.degree. C. in a tissue culture incubator.
[0900] At the end of the incubation period, the conditioned medium
is harvested and pre-cleared by the addition of 5 .mu.l normal
mouse serum and 50 ul of protein A Sepharose (Pharmacia), mixed by
end-over-end rotation for 30 minutes at 4.degree. C., followed by a
brief centrifugation in a microfuge. The supernatant is then
harvested and transferred to fresh tubes containing 5 ug of a
monoclonal antibody (examples of antibodies include but are not
limited by, clone 1101.1, directed against an internal peptide
sequence in A.beta.; or 6E10 from Senetek; or 4G8 from Senetek;
additionally polyclonals from rabbit antihuman A.beta. from
Boehringer Mannheim) and 50 .mu.l protein A Sepharose. After
incubation overnight at 4.degree. C., the samples are washed three
times with high salt washing buffer (50 mM Tris, pH 7.5, 500 mM
NaCl, 5 mM EDTA, 0.5% Nonidet P-40), three times with low salt wash
buffer (50 mM Tris, pH 7.5, 150 mM NaCl, 5 mM EDTA, 0.5% Nonidet
P-40), and three times with 10 mM Tris, pH 7.5. The pellet after
the last wash is resuspended in SDS sample buffer (Laemmli U.K.
Cleavage of structural proteins during the assembly of the head of
bacteriphage T4. Nature 227, 680-5, 1970.) and boiled for 3
minutes. The supernatant is then fractionated on either 10-20%
Tris/Tricine SDS gels or on 16.5% Tris/Tricine SDS gels. The gels
are dried and exposed to X-ray film or analyzed by phosphorimaging.
The resulting image is analyzed for the presence of A.beta.
polypeptides. The steady-state level of A.beta. in the presence of
a test compound is compared to wells treated with DMSO (1%) alone.
A typical test compound in this assay blocks A.beta. accumulation
in the conditioned medium, and is considered active with an
IC.sub.50 less than 100 .mu.M.
[0901] C-Terminus .beta. Amyloid Precursor Protein Accumulation
Assay (CTF Assay)
[0902] The effect of test compounds on the accumulation of
C-terminal fragments is determined by immunoprecipitation of APP
and fragments thereof from cell lysates. N 9 cells are
metabolically labeled, as above, with media containing
Tran35S-LABEL.TM., in the presence or absence of test compounds. At
the end of the incubation period, the conditioned medium are
harvested and cells lysed in RIPA buffer (10 mM Tris, pH 8.0
containing 1% Triton X-100, 1% deoxycholate, 0.1% SDS, 150 mM NaCl,
0.125% NaN.sub.3). Again, lysates are precleared with 5 ul normal
rabbit serum/50 ul protein A Sepharose, followed by the addition of
BC-1 antiserum (15 .mu.l;) and 50 .mu.l protein A Sepharose for 16
hours at 4.degree. C. The immunoprecipitates are washed as above,
bound proteins eluted by boiling in SDS sample buffer and
fractionated by Tris/Tricine SDS-PAGE. After exposure to X-ray film
or phosphorimager, the resulting images are analyzed for the
presence of C-terminal APP fragments. The steady-state level of
C-terminal APP fragments is compared to wells treated with DMSO
(1%) alone. A typical test compound in this assay stimulates
C-terminal fragment accumulation in the cell lysates, and is
considered active with an IC.sub.50 less than 100 .mu.M.
[0903] Accumulation-Release Assay
[0904] This immunoprecipitation assay is specific for .gamma.
secretase activity (i.e., proteolytic activity required to generate
the C-terminal end of A.beta. either by direct cleavage or
generating a C-terminal extended species which is subsequently
further proteolyzed). N 9 cells are pulse labeled with media
containing Tran35S-LABEL.TM. in the presence of a reported .gamma.
secretase inhibitor (MDL 28170; Higaki J, Quon D, Zhong Z, Cordell
B. Inhibition of beta-amyloid formation identifies proteolytic
precursors and subcellular site of catabolism. Neuron 14, 651-659,
1995) for 1 h, followed by washing to remove .sup.35S radiolabel
and MDL 28170. The media is replaced and test compounds are added
over a dose range (for example 0.1 nM to 100 uM). The cells are
chased for increasing periods of times and A.beta. is isolated from
the conditioned medium and C-terminal fragments from cell lysates
(see accumulation assay above). The activity of test compounds are
characterized by whether a stabilization of C-terminal fragments is
observed and whether A.beta. is generated from these accumulated
precursor. A typical test compound in this assay prevents the
generation of A.beta. out of accumulated C-terminal fragments and
is considered active with an IC.sub.50 less than 100 .mu.M.
[0905] Radioligand Competition Binding Assay (RCB Assay):
[0906] The following assay, of the invention, discloses a novel
assay to rapidly screen and evaluate potential inhibitors of
secretases. The assay enables screening for inhibitors of A.beta.
production or inhibitors of proteolytic activity leading to the
production of A.beta. by using a competitive binding assay wherein
more than one chemical entity competes for a binding site
identified for A.beta. production. For example, in a competitive
binding assay of the invention competition occurs between potential
A.beta. production inhibitors (i.e. compounds being investigated
for inhibitory activity) and a standard known for A.beta.
production inhibitory activity which standard has been tagged by a
radiolabel. Example 7T radiolabeled with tritium is a standard
identified for A.beta. production inhibitory activity; however, any
radiolabelled or tagged compound binding to the same site as
Example 7T could be used in this assay. It is understood that the
theory of competitive binding is well known to one skilled in the
art of pharmacology. The compounds identified by this invention may
have utility for the prevention and treatment of neurological
disorders relating to A.beta. production, including Alzheimer's
disease, by inhibiting A.beta. production.
[0907] Materials:
[0908] Assay buffer: Hepes 50 mM pH 7.0.
[0909] Competing compounds/potential inhibitors: weigh and dilute
in 100% DMSO at a concentration of 1.times.10.sup.-2M. From that
stock, a second (6.times.10.sup.-4M) stock is made in 100% DMSO.
The working stock (6.times.10.sup.-5M) is made from the second in
assay buffer containing 6% DMSO.
[0910] Wash buffer: Phosphate buffered saline containing 0.01%
triton X-100, pH 7.0 at 4.degree. C.
[0911] Membrane: HEK.sub.293 control membranes (Receptor Biology,
Inc.), or rat whole brain homogenates prepared as follows: Frozen
pellets of approximately 10 mg protein HEK.sub.293 cell membranes
are thawed on ice and homogenized in 10 ml of assay buffer, using a
Brinkman Polytron (PT-10) setting 6 for 10 sec. The homogenate was
centrifuged at 48,000.times.g for 12 minutes and the resulting
pellet washed by repeating the homogenization and centrifugation
steps. The final cell pellet was resuspended in buffer to yield a
protein concentration of approximately 0.35 mg/ml as assayed by the
method of Bradford (1976) using bovine serum albumin as the
standard.
[0912] Rats: for the rat whole brain homogenates, (male
Sprague-Dawley rats 200 to 300 g., Charles River) are decapitated
and brains dissected on an ice-chilled glass plate. Brains weighing
.about.2 g are homogenized in 20 ml of assay buffer and prepared by
the method described above for the cell homogenates. The final
pellet is resuspended to yield a protein conc. of .about.5 mg/ml
original wet weight.
[0913] Radiolabeled standard: [.sup.3H] I-7T (Example 7T;
synthesized by Dupont Pharm. Co.) S.A. 87.5 Ci/mMol, (11.43 .mu.M
I-7T).
[0914] Radioligand Competition Binding Assay Method:
[0915] Assays are initiated by addition of 150 .mu.l membrane
suspension (.about.0.35 mg protein/ml) to 150 .mu.l of assay buffer
containing 1% DMSO, 5 to 30 nM [.sup.3H] I-7T, and various
concentrations of inhibitors over a range of 1 picomolar to 100
micromolar. Binding assays are preformed in duplicate in disposable
polypropylene 96 well plates, (Costar Corp., Cambridge, Mass.) in a
final volume of 0.3 ml. Nonspecific binding is defined in the
presence of 3 .mu.M I-7T. Optimum incubation time at 23.degree. C.
is 1 hour. The separation of bound radioligand I-7T from free
radioligand I-7T is accomplished by rapid vacuum filtration of the
incubation mixture over GFF glass fiber filters (Inotech Biosystems
International, Lansing, Mich.) presoaked for 2 hours in 0.3%
polyethylinamine (pH 13) using an Inotech cell harvester. Filters
were washed 2 times with 0.3 ml of ice-cold phosphate buffered
saline pH 7.0 containing 0.01% Triton X100. Filters are accessed
for radioactivity by liquid scintillation counting using a Packard
2500 TR (Packard Instrument Co., Downers Grove, Ill.), having a
counting efficiency for tritium of .about.56%.
[0916] Alternatively, it is well known in the art that a homogenous
assay format, such as a scintillation proximity assay (SPA), could
be employed in the radioligand competition binding assay of the
invention. For example, membranes or membrane extracts can be
immobilized onto the SPA support, afterwhich the support is then
incubated with a tagged inhibitor of beta amyloid production in the
presence of a potential inhibitor of beta amyloid production. The
SPA support, by nature of its construction, magnifies the
radioactive scintillation signal of bound radioactive compounds
while not magnifying the radioactive signal of radioactive
compounds free in solution. Therefore, the bound tagged inhibitor
of beta amyloid production is detected and quantified by
scintillation counting in the presence of free tagged inhibitor of
beta amyloid production.
[0917] It is understood that the process of separating bound tagged
inhibitor of beta amyloid production from free tagged inhibitor of
beta amyloid production, for example bound radioligand I-7T from
free radioligand I-7T, can be conducted in a number of methods. For
example the process of separating includes, but is not limited to,
filtration or centrifugation. The process of separating is intended
to facilitate quantification of bound tagged inhibitor of beta
amyloid production. Therefore, the process of separating is also
intended to encompass homogeneous techniques, for example SPA,
where free tagged inhibitor of beta amyloid production in situ is
separated from the tagged inhibitor of beta amyloid production
bound to the solid support of the scintillant. Thus, in a
homogeneous technique such as SPA, the free and bound inhibitors
are considered separated from each other within the meaning of the
invention.
[0918] Radioligand Competition Binding Data Analysis:
[0919] Resulting disintigrations per minute (dpm's) are expressed
as percent inhibition of [.sup.3H] I-7T specific binding. IC.sub.50
values of competing compounds are calculated using the program
GraphPad Prism by GraphPad Software, (San Diego, Calif.). It is
understood that one skilled in the art can determine these values
using this program.
[0920] A good correlation for inhibition of proteolytic activity
leading to A.beta. production has been found between compounds
identified in functional assays for determination of A.beta.
production, for example the .beta. Amyloid Precursor Protein
Accumulation Assay, and compounds identified in the Radioligand
Competitive Binding Assay. The correlation is demonstrated by
plotting the IC.sub.50 values of compounds identified in the
functional assay verses the IC.sub.50 values of compounds
identified in the RCB Assay. Compounds from several chemical
series, including Examples disclosed herein, have exhibited, over a
range of potencies, similar IC.sub.50 values in the RCB Assay as
seen in an accumulation assay.
Example 98
[0921] 77
[0922] The compound of Example 98 was synthesized according to
procedures disclosed in PCT Application WO98/28268, published Jul.
2, 1998.
Example 98b
[0923] 78
[0924] The compound of Example 98b was synthesized according to
procedures disclosed in PCT Application WO98/28268, published Jul.
2, 1998.
Example 99
[0925] 79
[0926] Step (99a): The compound of Step (99a) is formed by coupling
succinate 7 (115 mg, 0.5 mmol) with the substituted caprolactam TFA
salt (212 mg, 0.5 mmol) from Step (2c) of Example 2 under the
conditions reported for the synthesis of the compound of Example 8.
The crude tert-butyl ester was taken on without further
purification.
[0927] Step (99b): The compound of Step (99b) is formed by
dissolving the crude product from Step (99a) in 5 mL of a 1:1
solution of TFA/CH.sub.2Cl.sub.2 and stirring at room temperature
for 2 hours. Concentration followed by reconcentration twice from
10 mL of toluene provides the crude acid which was taken on with no
further purification.
[0928] Step (99c): The title compound, Example 99, was prepared
using the acid from Step (99b) under the conditions reported for
the compound of Example 7. The compound was purified by
chromatography eluting with 5% methanol in CH.sub.2Cl.sub.2 to
afford 50 mg (21%, 3 steps) of a white powder. MS
(M+Na).sup.+=488.
Example 100
Binding of Example 7T to Cell Membranes
[0929] A survey of different cell lines was performed using the
radioligand competition binding assay, of the invention, with
Example 7T to identify membranes rich in binding sites for Example
7. Cell lines useful for performance of the RCB Assay are
preferentially human or mammalian cell lines. It is more prefered
that the cell lines express presenilin 1, presenilin 2 and/or
presenilin homologs (for example SEL-12). The cell lines surveyed
included HEK293 cells (ATCC CRL-1573), IMR 32 (ATCC CCL-127), RAJI
(ATCC CCL-86), CHO (ATCC CRL-9096), U-937 (ATCC CRL-1593), and
THP-1 (ATCC TIB-202).
[0930] Of the cell lines surveyed the best signal to noise ratio
(i.e., ratio of specific binding and non-specific binding) was
obtained using THP-1 cell membranes.
Example 101
Characterization of the Example 11T in the Radioligand Competition
Binding Assay
[0931] Example 11, a benzophenone derivative of Example 7, was
synthesized. When Example 11 was assayed in the .beta.APPA Assay
and separately in the RCB Assay with Example 7T as the radiolabeled
standard, a statistically significant correlation of IC.sub.50
values was observed between the two Assays.
[0932] Radiolabeled Example 11, i.e. Example 11T, was synthesized
and tested in the RCB Assay for equivalency to Example 7T. The
apparent Ki was calculated for four compounds (Example 7, Example
11, Example 98, and Example 99) and an statistically significant
correlation was observed between results obtained whether the RCB
Assay was conducted with Example 7T or Example 11T, indicating that
Example 11 binds to the same molecular target(s) in cell membranes.
Therefore, it was found that Example 11T could be used instead of
Example 7T as the radioactive tracer in the RCB Assay.
[0933] Analogously, it has also been found that Example 43T can be
used instead of Example 7T as the radioactive tracer in the RCB
Assay.
Example 102
Example 11 Reduces the Bmax of Example 7T
[0934] Cell membranes (THP-1) were incubated with Example 11 at
approximately 3 times the K.sub.d concentration for 1 hour at room
temperature under the conditions outlined for the RCB Assay.
Membranes were photolysed at 365 nm for 1 hour on ice. Control
membranes were incubated in parallel on ice. The membranes were
harvested (centrifuged at 40,000 G, 4.degree. C., 20 minutes) and
extensively washed with assay buffer. The membranes were
subsequently analyzed in the RCB Assay using Example 7T. A bmax of
938fmol/mg membranes was observed for unphotolysed membranes,
whereas the bmax was reduced to 238 fmol/mg membranes after
photolysing. However, the K.sub.d for Example 7T was not
statistically significantly changed. These results indicate that
Example 11 is cross-linked to the membrane binding site of Example
7.
[0935] Bmax is understood by one skilled in the art to represent
the maximum number of binding sites in a cell membrane. See Mary
Keen (Ed.) Receptor binding techniques. Methods in Molecular
Biology, Vol 106, Humana Press, Totowa, N.J., 1999.
[0936] In this experiment the membranes were photolysed at 365 nm,
which is appropriate for activation of the benzophenone moiety of
Example 11. It is understood that photolysation of the membranes
can occur at any wavelength that activates a photoactive tag to
cross link to the protein. Such wavelengths generally occur in the
250 to 450 nm range.
Example 103
Analysis of Cross-Linked Polypeptides by SDS-PAGE
[0937] THP-1 cell membranes were incubated with Example 11T exactly
as outlined under the methods for the RCB Assay of the invention in
the presence of an unlabeled competing compound; for Example 98 or
Example 99. After 1 hour incubation at room temperature, the
membranes were analyzed by the RCB assay (top panel, FIG. 1). The
membranes in parallel wells were photolysed (365 nm, as in Example
102) for 30 minutes on ice (alternatively, at room temperature).
Membranes were collected, boiled in SDS-containing buffer in the
absence (middle panel FIG. 1) or presence of dithiothreitol (50 mM)
(bottom panel FIG. 1) and fractionated by SDS-PAGE (12% acrylamide
in the separating gel). The polyacrylamide was fixed in 10% acetic
acid/20% methanol/70% water for 45 minutes at room temperature and
soaked for another 45 minutes in Amplify.TM. (Amersham) After
drying, the gel was exposed to X-ray film. In the absence of a
competing compound, labeling of a number of polypeptides was
observed. However, based on the ability of unlabeled compounds to
compete with the cross-linking reaction, major polypeptides, that
could be specifically cross-linked with Example 11T, of molecular
sizes of 30 (band A), 25 (band B), 20 (band C), and 10-12 (band D)
kD were identified.
[0938] Dose-response experiments using increasing concentrations in
the range of 1 picomolar to 100 micromolar of an unlabeled
competing compound were performed. The resulting samples were
either analyzed by the RCB Assay of the invention prior to
photolysis or by SDS-PAGE after photolysis. A statistically
significant correlation was observed between the competition in the
radioligand competition binding assay and the radioactivity
incorporated into the 30 (band A), 25 (band B), 20 kD (band C), and
10-12 kD (band D) bands as revealed by SDS-PAGE and
fluorography.
[0939] Thus, the quantitative reduction of cross-linking by
unlabeled compounds to the 30, 25, 20, and 10-12 kD bands
accurately tracks the reduction of specific binding in the binding
assay. These results indicate that identification of the
cross-linked species will identify the site of interaction in the
binding assay.
[0940] FIG. 1 illustrates the correlation between results of the
RCB assay and the cross-linking assay for DMSO (lane 1), Example 7
(lane 2), Example 98b (lane 3), Example 43 (lane 4), Example 99
(lane 5), and Example 11 (lane 6) at 1 micromolar. FIG. 1, top
panel, illustrates results of the RCB Assay for thesae compounds.
FIG. 1, middle panel, illustrates results of the cross-linking
assay for these compounds under non-reducing conditions. FIG. b 1,
bottom panel, illustrates results of the cross-linking assay for
these compounds under reducing conditions. Membranes were incubated
with Example 11T and DMSO or a number of unlabeled compounds and
analyzed by RCB assay. The total radioactivity associated with the
filter off is indicated. Parallel wells were photolysed as in
Example 103, and the membrane extracts were analyzed by SDS-PAGE
followed by fluorography. The mobility of molecular weight markers
(in kD) is indicated to the right. Note specific cross-linking to
polypeptides of 30 (band A), 25 (band B), 20 (band C), and 10-12
(band D) polypeptides. The radioactivity associated with band A is
stronger than that in bands B to D, suggesting that band A might be
a mixture of two polypeptides (i.e., presenilin 1 and presenilin 2;
see FIG. 4).
Example 104
Immunological Identification of the 30 kD and 20 kD Cross-Linked
Polypeptides of Example 103
[0941] THP-1 cell membranes (1 mg/ml) in 50 mM TRIS buffer, pH
7.4-7.5, were incubated with Example 11T for 1 hour at room
temperature and photolysed (as stated above) at room temperature
for 30 minutes. The membranes were collected by centrifugation. The
membranes were extracted with 50 mM Tris, pH 7.5 containing 100 mM
KCl, 2 mM EDTA, 2% CHAPS and 1 complete protease inhibitor tablet
per 25 ml buffer (COMPLETE.TM., Boehringer Mannheim; product number
1697 498)) for 1 hour at 4.degree. C. The detergent soluble
fraction was recovered by centrifugation (40,000 g, 30 min,
4.degree. C.). The membrane extract was diluted one half with
water. 500 ul of the membrane extract were pre-incubated with 10 ul
of normal mouse IgG and 50 ul anti-mouse IgG Sepharose (Sigma) for
1 hour at 4.degree. C. The supernatant was recovered by
centrifugation. Subsequently, 10 ug of preimmune IgG (Sigma) or 10
ug of a monoclonal antibody to presenilin 1 was added in the
presence of 50 ul anti-mouse IgG Sepharose. Examples of
commercially available antibodies to presenilin 1 are Chemicon
International: rat anti-human Presenilin 1 monoclonal antibody;
product number MAB 1563; or Santa Cruz Biotechnology: goat anti
Presenilin 1; product number SC-1244; or Santa Cruz Biotechnology:
goat anti Presenilin 1; product number SC-1245. For use with goat
antibodies, the immunoprecipitation was altered as follows: normal
goat IgG and protein G Sepharose was used for the pre-absorption
and protein G Sepharose was used in the presence of the goat
antibodies to presenilin 1. The membrane extract was incubated for
5 hours at 4.degree. C. The Sepharose beads were collected by
centrifugation and washed 3 times with 25 mM Tris, pH 7.5
containing 50 mM KCl, 1 mM EDTA and 1% CHAPS, followed by 3 washes
with phosphate buffered saline. Radioactivity bound to the
Sepharose beads was dissociated by boiling in SDS sample buffer
(4.times.) containing 50 mM dithiothreitol. The supernatant was
loaded onto a 12% SDS-PAGE and the gel was processed as above.
Fluorography revealed the presence of the approximately 30 (band
A), 20 (band C), and 10 kD (band D) polypeptides in the
immunoprecipitation with antibodies to presenilin 1, but not with
normal mouse IgG. (FIG. 2) These results indicate that the membrane
binding assay determines, at least in part, the binding of
radiolabeled secretase inhibitors to presenilin 1 fragments.
[0942] Subsequent experiments established that the lack of
polypeptide B in the initial immunoprecipitation experiments was
due to aggregation upon boiling of the sample in reduced SDS sample
buffer, indicating that all specifically labeled polypeptides (A to
D) can be specifically immunoprecipitated with antibodies to
presenilin 1 under non-denaturing conditions.
[0943] FIG. 2 illustrates a fluorography of a 12% SDS-PAGE. The
relative mobility of molecular weight standards (in kD) is
indicated to the left. THP-1 membranes were incubated (30 minutes;
room temperature) with Example 43T (30 nM) alone (panel A) or
Example 43T (30 nM) in the presence of Example 98 (panel B). The
membranes were photolysed at 365 nm for 30 minutes and the
membranes harvested by centrifugation. The membranes were extracted
with 50 mM Tris, pH 7.5 containing 100 mM KCl, 2 mM EDTA, 2% CHAPS
in the presence of protease inhibitors for 1 hour at 4.degree. C.
The membrane extracts were either directly fractionated by SDS-PAGE
(lanes 1 and 6) or after immunoprecipitation with preimmune IgG
(lanes 2 and 4) or antibodies to human presenilin 1 (lanes 3 and
5). Note the immunoprecipitation of specifically labeled bands of
approximately 30, 20, and 10 kD after cross-linking in the absence
of Example 98, but not in the presence of Example 98. The higher
molecular weight bands may represent the presenilin 1 holoprotein
and/or presenilin 1 aggregates formed in the presence of SDS.
Example 105
Purification of Cross-Linked Polypeptides by Affinity
Chromatography
[0944] THP-1 membranes were prepared and cross-linked as in Example
104. The membranes were extracted as in Example 104 at a protein
concentration of 10 mg membrane protein/1 ml extraction buffer.
Normal mouse IgG (Sigma) or monoclonal antibody to the C-terminal
loop of presenilin 1 was immobilized on agarose beads at 2 mg IgG
per 1 ml of beads. The membrane extract was diluted one half with
water and applied to a normal mouse IgG precolumn, followed by
anti-presenilin 1 IgG. The column material was extensively washed
with one half diluted extraction buffer, one half diluted
extraction buffer containing 1M KCl, and eluted with 0.1M glycine,
pH 2.5 in one half diluted extraction buffer. The resulting
polypeptides were analyzed by SDS-PAGE (12% acrylamide in the
separating gel), followed by fluorography (left top panel, FIG. 3),
silver staining (right top panel, FIG. 3), immunoblotting using
antibodies to the N-terminus of presenilin (left middle panel, FIG.
3) or the C-terminus of presenilin 1 (right middle panel, FIG. 3).
In addition, the silver stain (right top panel, FIG. 3) was soaked
in Amplify.TM. (Amersham), dried, and exposed the x-ray film. It is
concluded that the specifically cross-linked bands A, B, and C can
be enriched by presenilin 1 affinity chromatography. It should be
noted that using an antibody to the N-terminus of presenilin 1,
also band D could be enriched. Polypeptides A and C are major
silver stained protein bands containing the cross-linker of Example
11T and are immunoreactive with antibodies to presenilin 1. It
should be noted that the extraction procedure used will not
dissociate the association of macromolecules in the presenilin
complex. Accordingly, one skilled in the art will understand that
this technique can be employed to identify macromolecules
associated with the binding site that are involved in beta amyloid
precursor processing.
[0945] FIG. 3 illustrates isolation of cross-linked polypeptides by
presenilin 1 affinity chromatography. THP-1 membranes were
cross-linked as in FIG. 2 and the resulting membrane extracts were
applied to a normal mouse IgG Sepharose, followed by an
anti-presenilin 1 Sepharose. The starting material (lanes 1),
flow-through normal mouse IgG (lanes 2), flow-through presenilin 1
Sepharose (lanes 3), last wash prior to elution (lanes 4), and
elution by lowering the pH (lanes 5) are indicated. The relative
mobility of molecular weight markers is indicated. The left top
panel shows a fluorography of a 12% SDS-PAGE. Note the enrichment
of bands A to C on the presenilin 1 affinity column. The silver
stain (top right panel) reveals that bands A and C are clearly
enriched, distinguishable from contaminating proteins, and present
in purity sufficient for sequence analysis. The silver stain was
soaked in Amplify.TM. (Amersham), dried, and exposed to x-ray film
(bottom left panel). It should be noted that major polypeptides in
the elution fraction as revealed by silver staining perfectly align
with the radioactivity as revealed by fluorography. The identify of
band A as presenilin 1 N-terminal fragments was revealed by
immunoblotting using N-terminal-specific antibodies (left middle
panel), whereas band C was identified as presenilin C-terminal
fragments (right middle panel).
[0946] It is understood by one skilled in the art that this or
similar purification schemes can be employed to isolate
radiolabeled binding polypeptides in sufficient quantities to allow
for N-terminal amino acid or mass spectoscropy analysis. Also, one
skilled in the art understands that isolated radiolabeled
polypeptides can be further fractionated after chemical or
proteolytic digestion to isolate one or several radiolabeled
polypeptides in the sizes of approximately 2 to 100 amino acids.
Sequence analysis will reveal the location of the smaller
polypeptides in the protein sequence of the binding site molecules.
In addition, this method can be used to define specifically
cross-linked amino acids in the binding site. This information can
ultimately be used in rational drug design for Alzheimer's disease.
It should be noted that both N- and C-terminal presenilin 1
fragments are labeled by Example 11T. This observation is
consistent with the notion that the binding site is contained in
proteolytic fragments of presenilin 1 generated upon incorporation
in the presenilin 1 complex.
Example 106
Evidence for the Involvement of Presenilin 2 in the Binding
Site
[0947] THP-1 membranes were prepared and analyzed as in Example
104. The presenilin 1 antibodies were replaced with rabbit
polyclonal antibodies specific for presenilin 2. The following
modifications were included in comparison to Example 104: samples
were pre-absorbed with normal rabbit IgG and protein A Sepharose
was used instead of anti-mouse IgG Sepharose. The resulting
immunoprecipitates were analyzed by SDS-PAGE (12% acrylamide in the
separating gel) followed by fluorography. (See FIG. 4) Bands A and
B was specifically precipitated with an antibody to presenilin 2
(N-terminus), whereas antibodies to the C-terminus of presenilin 2
preferentially identified band B. These results indicate that the
membrane binding assay determines, at least in part, the binding of
radiolabeled secretase inhibitors to presenilin 2 fragments. One
skilled in the art will realize that the cross-linking assay can be
used to identify compounds with preferential affinity for either
presenilin 1 or 2. Membranes derived from organisms lacking either
presenilin 1 or 2, or both, might be used for the same purpose.
[0948] FIG. 4 illustrates a fluorography of a 12% SDS-PAGE. The
relative mobility of molecular weight standards (in kD) is
indicated to the right. THP-1 membranes were incubated (30 minutes;
room temperature) with Example 11T, photolyzed at 365 nm for 30
minutes, and the membranes harvested by centrifugation. The
membranes were extracted with 50 mM Tris, pH 7.5 containing 100 mM
KCl, 2 mM EDTA, 2% CHAPS in the presence of protease inhibitors for
1 hour at 4.degree. C. The membrane extracts were either directly
fractionated by SDS-PAGE (lane 1) or after immunoprecipitation with
preimmune IgG (lane 4) or antibodies to human presenilin 2 (lane 2,
PS-2 N-terminal specific antibody; lane 3, PS-2 C-terminal specific
antibody). Note the immunoprecipitation of specifically labeled
bands A and B of approximately 30 and 25 kD.
[0949] It is understood by one skilled in the art that the assays
disclosed herein, specifically the Radio Competition Binding Assay
and the cross-linking Assay may be employed to differentiate
between inhibitors specific for presenilin-1 and presenilin-2. For
example, differential competition for radioactivity incorporation
in bands A to D would indicate presenilin-1 and/or presenilin-2
specific compounds. Moreover, binding to membranes derived from
mammalian cells deficient in either PS-1 or PS-2 may be employed to
identify PS-1 or PS-2 specific compounds. For example these cells
may be derived from organisms, for example murine, which are gene
targeted for PS-1 or PS-2. Examples of cells include fibroblasts,
neurons, and whole embryonic membranes.
[0950] It is understood that the isolation and sequence data for
presenilin-1 (PS-1) cloning has been published in Sherrington R et
al., Nature, Vol 375, pp 754-760, 1995, herein incorporated by
reference. It is also understood that the isolation and sequence
data for presenilin-2 (PS-2) cloning has been published in Rogaev
E. I. et al., Nature, Vol 376, pp774-778, 1995, herein incorporated
by reference.
In Vivo Diagnostic Imaging Utility
[0951] The radiolabeled compounds of the invention are useful as
radiopharmaceuticals for imaging sites involved in beta-amyloid
production, and thus may be used to diagnose present or potential
disorders involving beta-amyloid production, including but not
limited to Alzheimer's disease. The patient may be any type of a
mammal, but is preferably a human. The radiolabeled compounds may
be used alone, or may be employed as a composition with a
radiopharmaceutically acceptable carrier, and/or in combination
with other diagnostic or therapeutic agents. Suitable
radiopharmaceuticals carriers and suitable amounts thereof are well
known in the art, and can be found in, for example, Remington's
Pharmaceutical Sciences, Gennaro, A. R., ed., Mack Publishing
Company, Easton, Pa. (1985), and The United States Pharmacopia--The
National Formulary, 22nd Revision, Mack Printing Company, Easton,
Pa. (1990), standard reference texts in the pharmaceutical field.
Other materials may be added, as convenient, to stabilize the
composition, as those skilled in the art will recognize, including
antioxidizing agents such as sodium bisulfite, sodium sulfite,
ascorbic acid, gentisic acid or citric acid (or their salts) or
sodium ethylenediamine tetraacetic acid (sodium EDTA), as is well
known in the art. Such other materials, as well as suitable amounts
thereof, are also described in Remington's Pharmaceutical Sciences
and The United States Pharmacopia--The National Formulary, cited
above.
[0952] The present invention also includes radiopharmaceutical kits
containing the labeled compounds of the invention. Such kits may
contain the labeled compounds in sterile lyophilized form, and may
include a sterile container of a radiopharmaceutically acceptable
reconstitution liquid. Suitable reconstitution liquids are
disclosed in Remington's Pharmaceutical Sciences and The United
States Pharmacopia--The National Formulary, cited above. Such kits
may alternatively contain a sterile container of a composition of
the radiolabeled compounds of the invention. Such kits may also
include, if desired, other conventional kit components, such as,
for example, one or more carriers, one or more additional vials for
mixing. Instructions, either as inserts or labels, indicating
quantities of the labeled compounds of the invention and carrier,
guidelines for mixing these components, and protocols for
administration may also be included in the kit. Sterilization of
the containers and any materials included in the kit and
lyophilization (also referred to as freeze-drying) of the labeled
compounds of the invention may be carried out using conventional
sterilization and lyophilization methodologies known to those
skilled in the art.
[0953] To carry out the method of the invention, the radiolabeled
compounds are generally administered intravenously, by bolus
injection, although they may be administered by any means that
produces contact of the compounds with sites of beta-amyloid
production, particularly in sites in the brain. Suitable amounts
for administration will be readily ascertainable to those skilled
in the art, once armed with the present disclosure. The dosage
administered will, of course, vary depending up such known factors
as the particular compound administered, the age, health and weight
or the nature and extent of any symptoms experienced by the
patient, the amount of radiolabeling, the particular radionuclide
used as the label, the rate of clearance of the radiolabeled
compounds from the patient.
[0954] Acceptable ranges for administration of radiolabeled
materials are tabulated, for example, in the Physicians Desk
Reference (PDR) for Nuclear Medicine, published by Medical
Exonomics Company, a well-known reference text. A discussion of
some of the aforementioned considerations is provided in Eckelman
et al., J. Nucl. Med., Vol. 209, pp. 350-357 (1979). By way of
general guidance, a dosage range of the radiolabeled compounds of
the invention may be between about 1 and about 40 mCi.
[0955] Once the radiolabeled compounds of the invention are
administered, the presence of sites involved in beta-amyloid
production may be visualized using standard imaging systems. Such
imaging systems are well known in the art, and are discussed, for
example, in Macovski, A., Medical Imaging Systems, Information and
Systems Science Series, Kailath, T., ed., Prentice-Hall, Inc.,
Englewood Cliffs, NJ (1983). Particularly preferred is positron
emission tomography (PET). Specifically, imaging is carried out by
scanning the entire patient, or a particular region of the patient
using the detection system, and detecting the radioisotope signal.
The detected signal is then converted into an image. The resultant
images should be read by an experienced observer, such as, for
example, a nuclear medicine physician. The foregoing process is
referred to herein as "imaging" the patient. Generally, imaging is
carried out about 1 minute to about 48 hours following
administration of the radiolabeled compound of the invention. The
precise timing of the imaging will be dependant upon such factors
as the half-life of the radioisotope employed, and the clearance
rate of the compound administered, as will be readily apparent to
those skilled in the art. Preferably, imaging is carried out
between about 1 minute and about 4 hours following
administration.
[0956] The advantage of employing the radiolabeled compounds of the
invention, which have the ability to localize specifically and with
high affinity in sites involved in beta-amyloid production, to
detect the presence of such sites involved in beta-amyloid
production and/or to diagnose disorders in a patient involving
beta-amyloid production, will be readily apparent to those skilled
in the art, once armed with the present disclosure.
Dosage and Formulation
[0957] The compounds determined from the present invention can be
administered orally using any pharmaceutically acceptable dosage
form known in the art for such administration. The active
ingredient can be supplied in solid dosage forms such as dry
powders, granules, tablets or capsules, or in liquid dosage forms,
such as syrups or aqueous suspensions. The active ingredient can be
administered alone, but is generally administered with a
pharmaceutical carrier. A valuable treatise with respect to
pharmaceutical dosage forms is Remington's Pharmaceutical Sciences,
Mack Publishing.
[0958] The compounds determined from the present invention can be
administered in such oral dosage forms as tablets, capsules (each
of which includes sustained release or timed release formulations),
pills, powders, granules, elixirs, tinctures, suspensions, syrups,
and emulsions. Likewise, they may also be administered in
intravenous (bolus or infusion), intraperitoneal, subcutaneous, or
intramuscular form, all using dosage forms well known to those of
ordinary skill in the pharmaceutical arts. An effective but
non-toxic amount of the compound desired can be employed to prevent
or treat neurological disorders related to .beta.-amyloid
production or accumulation, such as Alzheimer's disease and Down's
Syndrome.
[0959] The compounds of this invention can be administered by any
means that produces contact of the active agent with the agent's
site of action in the body of a host, such as a human or a mammal.
They can be administered by any conventional means available for
use in conjunction with pharmaceuticals, either as individual
therapeutic agents or in a combination of therapeutic agents. They
can be administered alone, but generally administered with a
pharmaceutical carrier selected on the basis of the chosen route of
administration and standard pharmaceutical practice.
[0960] The dosage regimen for the compounds determined from the
present invention will, of course, vary depending upon known
factors, such as the pharmacodynamic characteristics of the
particular agent and its mode and route of administration; the
species, age, sex, health, medical condition, and weight of the
recipient; the nature and extent of the symptoms; the kind of
concurrent treatment; the frequency of treatment; the route of
administration, the renal and hepatic function of the patient, and
the effect desired. An ordinarily skilled physician or veterinarian
can readily determine and prescribe the effective amount of the
drug required to prevent, counter, or arrest the progress of the
condition.
[0961] Advantageously, compounds determined from the present
invention may be administered in a single daily dose, or the total
daily dosage may be administered in divided doses of two, three, or
four times daily.
[0962] The compounds identified using the present invention can be
administered in intranasal form via topical use of suitable
intranasal vehicles, or via transdermal routes, using those forms
of transdermal skin patches wall known to those of ordinary skill
in that art. To be administered in the form of a transdermal
delivery system, the dosage administration will, of course, be
continuous rather than intermittant throughout the dosage
regimen.
[0963] In the methods of the present invention, the compounds
herein described in detail can form the active ingredient, and are
typically administered in admixture with suitable pharmaceutical
diluents, excipients, or carriers (collectively referred to herein
as carrier materials) suitably selected with respect to the
intended form of administration, that is, oral tablets, capsules,
elixirs, syrups and the like, and consistent with conventional
pharmaceutical practices.
[0964] For instance, for oral administration in the form of a
tablet or capsule, the active drug component can be combined with
an oral, non-toxic, pharmaceutically acceptable, inert carrier such
as lactose, starch, sucrose, glucose, methyl callulose, magnesium
stearate, dicalcium phosphate, calcium sulfate, mannitol, sorbitol
and the like; for oral administration in liquid form, the oral drug
components can be combined with any oral, non-toxic,
pharmaceutically acceptable inert carrier such as ethanol,
glycerol, water, and the like. Moreover, when desired or necessary,
suitable binders, lubricants, disintegrating agents, and coloring
agents can also be incorporated into the mixture. Suitable binders
include starch, gelatin, natural sugars such as glucose or
.beta.-lactose, corn sweeteners, natural and synthetic gums such as
acacia, tragacanth, or sodium alginate, carboxymethylcellulose,
polyethylene glycol, waxes, and the like. Lubricants used in these
dosage forms include sodium oleate, sodium stearate, magnesium
stearate, sodium benzoate, sodium acetate, sodium chloride, and the
like. Disintegrators include, without limitation, starch, methyl
cellulose, agar, bentonite, xanthan gum, and the like.
[0965] The compounds determined from the present invention can also
be administered in the form of liposome delivery systems, such as
small unilamellar vesicles, large unilamallar vesicles, and
multilamellar vesicles. Liposomes can be formed from a variety of
phospholipids, such as cholesterol, stearylamine, or
phosphatidylcholines.
[0966] Compounds of the present invention may also be coupled with
soluble polymers as targetable drug carriers. Such polymers can
include polyvinylpyrrolidone, pyran copolymer,
polyhydroxypropylmethacrylamide-ph- enol,
polyhydroxyethylaspartamidephenol, or polyethyleneoxide-polylysine
substituted with palmitoyl residues. Furthermore, the compounds
determined from the present invention may be coupled to a class of
biodegradable polymers useful in achieving controlled release of a
drug, for example, polylactic acid, polyglycolic acid, copolymers
of polylactic and polyglycolic acid, polyepsilon caprolactone,
polyhydroxy butyric acid, polyorthoesters, polyacetals,
polydihydropyrans, polycyanoacylates, and crosslinked or
amphipathic block copolymers of hydrogels.
[0967] Gelatin capsules may contain the active ingredient and
powdered carriers, such as lactose, starch, cellulose derivatives,
magnesium stearate, stearic acid, and the like. Similar diluents
can be used to make compressed tablets. Both tablets and capsules
can be manufactured as sustained release products to provide for
continuous release of medication over a period of hours. Compressed
tablets can be sugar coated or film coated to mask any unpleasant
taste and protect the tablet from the atmosphere, or enteric coated
for selective disintegration in the gastrointestinal tract.
[0968] Liquid dosage forms for oral administration can contain
coloring and flavoring to increase patient acceptance. In general,
water, a suitable oil, saline, aqueous dextrose (glucose), and
related sugar solutions and glycols such as propylene glycol or
polyethylene glycols are suitable carriers for parenteral
solutions. Solutions for parenteral administration preferably
contain a water soluble salt of the active ingredient, suitable
stabilizing agents, and if necessary, buffer substances.
Antioxidizing agents such as sodium bisulfite, sodium sulfite, or
ascorbic acid, either alone or combined, are suitable stabilizing
agents. Also used are citric acid and its salts and sodium EDTA. In
addition, parenteral solutions can contain preservatives, such as
benzalkonium chloride, methyl- or propyl-paraben, and
chlorobutanol.
[0969] Suitable pharmaceutical carriers are described in
Remington's Pharmaceutical Sciences, Mack Publishing Company, a
standard reference text in this field.
* * * * *